Lux 50 Handbook

ALCATEL
9400 UX
LUX50
User Manual
3CC14295ABAA TQBJA 01
Status
Released
Change Note
Short Title Alcatel 9400UX LUX50 2.0

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2/348
Issue 01 January 2005
3CC14295ABAA TQ BJA 01
11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25 or 38 GHz

Small and Medium Capacity
Digital Microwave Link
with supervision
946LUX50
3/348
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4/348
Customer Service Support:
a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction
Congratulations on having bought your equipment from Alcatel.

We hope that it will give you full satisfaction.
For any additional information, about your Alcatel Welcome Center (for Technical Support or for repair process),
please contact your Alcatel Contract Manager.
5/348
6/348
Table of contents
1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1.1 Structure of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1.2 Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1.3 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3 Symbols used in the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4 Certificate of compliance with European safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.5 EcoDeclaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.6 Public exposition to electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
14
15
16
17
18
2 Description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
2.1 Alcatel 9400 Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1.1 Simplified description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 ALCATEL 9400 UX features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4 Capacity configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.5 Typical hardware configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
20
22
26
26
2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Basic 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
28
32
34
2.3 Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3.1 ESC number 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 ESC number 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 ESC numbers 3 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.4 ESC number 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
37
37
38
39
2.4 Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
2.5 Loopback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
2.6 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
2.7 IDU controls, indications and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7.1 Classic main IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2 Light IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3 Extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4 Access IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
43
45
46
47
2.8 Technical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
2.9 Frequency agility bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
3.1 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Checking the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
61
3.2 Labels on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1 Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft) . . . . . . . . .
62
66
3.3 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
7/348
3.3.1 Information required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3.2 Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Torques for the screws and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
68
68
69
3.4 Installing 19 IDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4.1 Installation on feet or on a wall mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Laborack or 9U subrack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
70
70
3.5 Outdoor part installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Choosing antenna polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101) . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5 Installation with non-integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
75
75
83
89
3.6 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Wiring the power supply to the 19 indoor units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Equipment grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 IDU/ODU wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.4 Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.5 Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.6 Engineering service channel wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.7 Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.8 Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
94
95
97
99
99
101
102
102
3.7 Wiring between a terminals units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7.1 Main IDU - extension IDU wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
103
104
3.8 Wiring between terminals of a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8.1 Tributary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2 ESC wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
105
105
4 Configuration and operation software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
4.1 Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Warning note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
4.2 Summary of SW installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1 Software loading in PC WINDOWSNT/XP/2000 environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 Installation of CT + NE software from CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
109
109
129
4.3 CT initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3.1 Preliminary Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Craft Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 NE Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 NE software downloading preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
130
130
130
132
4.4 Software download toward NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Summary of the SW installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 SW download to the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
133
133
133
4.5 NE Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
4.6 General Introduction to views and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.1 946LUX50 view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
135
4.7 Introduction to the menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
4.8 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
8/348
4.8.1 NE Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.2 Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.3 Alarm Severities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.4 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.8.5 Quick Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
143
151
156
160
4.9 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
4.10 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.10.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.10.2 NMS Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
184
187
4.11 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.1 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.3 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.4 RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.5 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11.6 BER Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
189
189
190
191
192
197
4.12 EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12.1 Input External Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12.2 Output External Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
198
199
4.13 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.2 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.13.3 Software Feature key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200
200
201
202
4.14 PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.14.1 Mux/Demux Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.2 Radio Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.14.3 HSB Transmission Protection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
204
207
211
4.15 LOOPBACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.1 Available Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.2 How to activate a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.15.3 How to remove a loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
214
219
220
4.16 DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.1 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.2 Log Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.3 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.4 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.5 Summary Block Diagram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.16.6 Current Configuration View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
221
222
223
224
225
228
4.17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.17.1 General information on the performance monitoring process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.2 Performance menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.3 CD (Current Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.4 HD (History Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.17.5 Threshold Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
229
231
233
234
235
4.18 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.18.1 Server Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.2 Init SW Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.18.3 SW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
237
237
238
240
5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
5.1 Order of commissioning for a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
9/348
5.2 Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2.1 Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Powering up the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Configuring the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.4 Checking out operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
244
245
245
245
5.3 Installing and commissioning station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 Checking out operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
247
247
248
248
5.4 Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.1 Pointing the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Checking the radio transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3 Remote tributary loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.4 Checking the transmit/receive switching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.5 Checking quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.6 End of commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
249
249
249
250
251
251
6 Operation, servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
6.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
6.2 Corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2.1 Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Analyzing IDU alarm indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 Corrective Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
253
253
254
6.3 Changing IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3.1 Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2 Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3 Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4 Replacing like for like an extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5 Note on IDU compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254
254
254
255
255
256
6.4 Changing ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
257
7 Changing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
7.1 Changing frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1.1 Changing frequency within the same sub-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
261
261
7.2 Changing tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2.1 Enabling inactive tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4 Changing bit rate by software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5 Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
262
262
270
271
272
7.3 Changing software feature key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
7.4 Changing a NEs IP Address and/or OSPF Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4.1 From the station configured as a network element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
275
7.5 Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.5.1 Installing 946LUX50 1320CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5.2 Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
276
276
277
277
10/348
7.6 Opening an IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.1 Indoor unit configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
279
7.7 Telephone service channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7.1 Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.7.2 Configuring the ESC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
281
281
7.8 Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic and extension IDU) . . . . .
7.8.1 Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2 Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.3 Adding an ESC extension IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
282
284
292
7.9 Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.1 Switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.2 Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
293
293
293
7.10 Configuring remote indication loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.10.1 Classic (main) IDU remote indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2 Light IDU versions remote indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
294
296
7.11 Changing redundancy configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.11.1 Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection . . . . . . . . .
7.11.2 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.3 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU . . . . . . .
7.11.4 Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11.5 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU . . . .
7.11.6 Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
297
297
298
298
299
300
301
7.12 Changing power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.12.1 All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12.2 Frequency bands without RTPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
302
302
7.13 Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
304
7.14 Changing SIMM memory boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
7.15 Replacing consumable items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.15.1 MCU board battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15.2 Changing fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15.3 Changing a fuse of an IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
306
308
310
Appendix 1 Human exposure to electromagnetic fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
A.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
A.1.2 Standards and regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.1.2.1 ICNIRP guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1.2.2 European regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
311
311
A.1.3 Evaluation of safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
A.1.4 Safety parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
A.1.5 Implementation of protection rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
A.1.6 Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
315
Appendix 2 Installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
316
Appendix 3 Set of consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
Appendix 4 Service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
320
11/348
A.4.1 Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
321
Appendix 5 Assembling N type coaxial connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
A.5.1 Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
A.5.2 Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
Appendix 6 Pin out of user ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
A.6.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.1.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.1.2 34 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
324
325
A.6.2 Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.2.1 Supervision bus interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.2.2 Telephone ESC with selective calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.2.3 Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
326
326
326
326
A.6.3 Alarms and TS/TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.3.1 ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector on the Light IDU versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.3.2 ALARMS I/O connector on the main IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
330
330
A.6.4 IDU F connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A.6.4.1 9Pin subD connector wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6.4.2 F Interface adapter cable wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
331
331
Appendix 7 Alarm synthesis indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
Appendix 8 Alarm Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
334
Appendix 9 List of models and commercial items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
336
A.9.1 List of models and commercial items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
Appendix 10 Software and documentation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
A.10.1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
A.10.2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
342
Appendix 11 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
345
12/348
1 Foreword
1.1
Structure of the manual
This manual is for users with a solid knowledge of how to operate and install microwave links and how to use
a PC-based craft terminal running the Windows operating system. With this manual, you should quickly be
able to operate the equipment. This manual is not intended to replace the training services that we can provide
for your particular needs.
The manual is divided into seven chapters followed by appendixes and an Index.
1.2
Foreword
Description of the equipment
Installation
Configuration and operation software
Commissioning
Operation, servicing and maintenance
Changing configurations
Appendixes
Index
Using the manual
With this manual, you should be able to commission and operate the described equipment at a basic level.
You should always read this manual in conjunction with the attached Update document (if provided) so that
you are aware of the latest equipment upgrades.
Manual updates
This edition of the manual describes hardware and software releases of the revision indexes (and above),
detailed in Appendix 9.
In cases where an equipment upgrade affects the content of the manual, the relevant modification should be
inserted in the Update document, with the same reference number, but with code type VE (instead of TQ).
When the number or extent of the changes justifies it, they should be incorporated in the body of the manual
and the manuals revision index should be incremented.
Previous versions of this documentation release
Previous versions of this documentation are available on request
Note: MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
13/348
1.3
Safety instructions
1.3.1 General rules

The following general safety precautions must be observed by the installer and the operator. ALCATEL
assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment, always connect the power cable ground to an
appropriate grounding device.
DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases or fumes.
For protection against fire: only replace the line fuse(s) with fuse(s) of the same voltage, current rating and
type.
Dangerous voltages: Users must not remove equipment covers or shields. The installation and maintenance
procedures described in this manual are for use by service-trained personnel only.
DO NOT operate equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection
features built into this equipment have been impaired, ISOLATE FROM THE POWER SUPPLY and do not use
the equipment until safe operation can be verified by servicetrained personnel. If necessary, return the
equipment to Alcatel After Sales for service and repair.
DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Return the product to Alcatel Customer Service for servicing
and repair.
Each main IDU contains a lithium battery to back up data. This battery should be changed every 7 to 10 years,
when inventory memory becomes empty following a power outage (see 7.15.1).
CAUTION
There is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.
Only replace with a battery of the same type:
M4T28BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicrolectronics
Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.
Do not burn and do not recharge.
1.3.2 Symbols
1.3.2.1 Danger symbols
When subsystems and modules have warning labels, it is extremely important to follow their instructions.
These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or any text
considered necessary to protect users and employees.
The most frequent danger situations and symbols are:
Danger or general warning
Prompts the user to refer to the manual.
Dangerous electrical voltages

Close to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V AC peak, 60 V DC; power level >240 VA) you will find
this warning label
Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts
14/348
1.3.2.2 Grounding symbols

Terminal for connecting the protective ground in power supply wiring
Other ground terminal

1.3.2.3 Other symbols
Indicates compliance with European standards
Emissions frequency: check that this complies with the standards in use in the country.
Radiation alert
1.3.3 Symbols used in the document

These symbols alert the reader the possible risks. They indicate:
the cause and type of danger,
the possible consequences,
the preventive action.
1.3.3.1 Warning
protection of personnel,
warning of a possibly dangerous situation,
danger of fatal or serious injury.
protection of equipment,
1.3.3.2 Precautions
STOP
warning of a procedure, practice or condition that could be dangerous to

equipment or its environment,
danger of damage to the equipment or its environment; permanent loss of data

possible.
This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it will

cause the link to be temporarily disconnected.
This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it cannot

be continued without a full knowledge of the data contained in the procedure
sheet concerning the stations concerned.
15/348
1.3.4 Certificate of compliance with European safety standards
16/348
1.3.5 EcoDeclaration
17/348
1.3.6 Public exposition to electromagnetic fields

The public protection from electromagnetic fields emitted by the antenna of the 9400UX is one of the main
requirements of the R&TTE Directive. An evaluation of the security measures to be implemented is presented
in Appendix 1.
18/348
2 Description of the equipment

2.1
ALCATEL 9400 Family
The Alcatel 9400 is a family of digital pointtopoint microwave radio systems, designed to satisfy the various
digital transmission needs of public and private networks for a large range of applications.
The Alcatel 9400 UX family covers the frequency range from 11 to 38 GHz necessary to satisfy the largest range
of propagation conditions as well as network configurations that also provide a high spectrum efficiency from
11 up to 38 GHz band with a 16QAM version.
It provides the following capacities:
2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s with the 4QAM modulation and 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s; 34 Mbit/s with
16QAM modulation.
The Alcatel 9400 UX family is used worldwide in:
cellular networks,
fixed access networks for Public Telecom or CLECs (Competitive Local Exchange Carrier), including:
infrastructure of Wireless IP networks,
direct complementary pointtopoint access in LMDS (Local Multipoint Distribution Services)

networks,
private networks,
and Utility networks, Security/Defense networks, etc.
Typically, the distances achieved are:

from 5 to 30 km for the microwave frequencies (11 to 18 GHz),
from a few hundred meters up to 10 km for the millimeter wave frequencies (23 to 38 GHz).
2.1.1 Simplified description

The A9400 UX is fully compliant with the international requirements in the 11,13, 15, 18, 23, 25 and 38 GHz
bands with the main Tx/Rx separations available depending on the national regulations.
Alcatel 9400 UX 2x2 to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s
Designation
Band
(GHz)
9411 UX
4QAM/16QAM
11
10.711.73
9413 UX
4QAM
13
12.7513.25
EN 301 128
ERC 1202
ITUR Rec F4977
266
9413 UX
16QAM
13
12.7513.25
EN 301 128
ERC 1202
ITUR Rec F4977
266
9415 UX
4QAM
15
14.415.35
EN 301 128
ERC 1207
ITUR Rec F6363
728, 315, 420, 490
9415 UX
16QAM
15
14,415,35
EN 301 128
ERC 1207
ITUR Rec F6363
728, 315, 420, 490
9418 UX
4QAM
18
17.719.7
EN 301 128
ERC 1203
ITUR Rec F5953
1010, 1008, 340,

1560
9418 UX
16QAM
18
17,719,7
EN 301 128
ERC 1203
ITUR Rec F5953
1010, 1008, 340,

1560, 1092.5
Frequency
(GHz)
ETSI Standard
Frequency plans
Duplex difference
(MHz) *
530
19/348
Designation
Band
(GHz)
Frequency
(GHz)
9423 UX
4QAM
23
21.223.6
EN 300 198
ERC 130 2 annex

A ITUR Rec
F6373
1008, 1197, 1200,

1232
9423 UX
16QAM
23
21.223.6
EN 300 198
ERC 130 2 annex

A ITUR Rec
F6373
1008, 1197, 1200,

1232
9425 UX
4QAM
25
24.526.52
EN 300 431
Class 1
ERC 1302 annex B

ITUR Rec F7483
1008
9425 UX
16QAM
25
24.526.52
EN 300 431
Class 4
ERC 1302 annex B

ITUR Rec F7483
1008
9428 UX
4QAM
28
27.5429.45
9438 UX
4QAM
38
3739.5
EN 300 197
ERC 1201
ITUR Rec F7491
1260
9438 UX
16QAM
38
3739.5
EN 300 197
ERC 1201
ITUR Rec F7491
1260
ETSI Standard
Frequency plans
Duplex difference
(MHz) *
1008
(*) Please consult factory if other Tx/Rx separations are requested.

The Alcatel 9400 UX system features high spectrum efficiency (minimum use of RF bandwidth for a given
capacity). The spectrum efficiency is optimized with the use of a 4 QAM or 16 QAM modulation (4 or 16 states
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) with digital filtering, providing compliance with the relevant ETSI spectrum
masks and spurious emissions requirements (ERC Rec 7401).
Capacity
(Mbit/s)
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2
34+2
RF channeling
(4QAM modulation)
(MHz)
3.5
14
28
RF channeling
(16QAM modulation)
(MHz)
14
2.1.2 Configuration
2.1.2.1 Unprotected configuration
An Alcatel 9400 UX unprotected (1+0) radio terminal is made up of the following elements:
an Outdoor Unit (ODU): incorporating the complete RF transceiver (modem, RF units, branching filter)
and an integrated or separated antenna.The ODU is capacity independent,
an Indoor Unit (IDU): incorporating the baseband processing and offering tributary interfaces as well
as service channels and supervision.
The IDU is frequency independent (same unit from 11 up to 38 GHz).

Different IDU configurations are available depending on system configuration:
a light version available in 1+0 configuration and up to 4x2 Mbit/s,
20/348
a classic version allowing all possible configurations (1+0, 1+1, capacity up to 16x2 or 34 +2 Mbit/s).
These two IDU versions are compatible with a same ODU and can be mixed in the same network.
a single coaxial cable of a length which can be up to 300 m.
1+0 9400 UX Outdoor Unit on its pole mounting, with 30

cm integrated antenna
Main IDU and Equipment Craft Terminal
New generation unit 9400UX flat ODU
Figure 1 Alcatel 9400 UX 1+0 configuration

2.1.2.2 Protected configuration
Two types of problem can impact the availability of a radio link: equipment failures and propagation problems.
1+1 protected configurations are used to increase the availability of the link compared to 1+0 unprotected
configuration, by adding redundant functions to the equipment on the Outdoor and Indoor parts:
to secure the link in case of temporary (transient alarm) or definitive (equipment failure) malfunction,
to improve the performances of the equipment towards propagation problem (in some outdoor unit
configurations only).
The (1+1) configurations include automatic errorless Rx switching.

If the link is protected, wayside traffic and auxiliary channels are automatically protected.
Various protected configurations are available with the following applications:
ODU CONFIGURATION
APPLICATIONS
9400 UX
1+0
1x ODU
1x antenna single
polarization
Nonprotected
1+1 HSB
2x ODU at same
frequency
1x coupler
1x antenna single
polarization
Protection against failures
1+1 HSB SD
2x ODU at same
frequency
2x antenna single
polarization
Improvement of
performance versus
multipath propagation
1+1 FD
2x ODU at different
frequencies
2x antenna single
polarization (or 1 antenna
dual polarization)
Improvement of
performance versus
multipath propagation
SD : Space Diversity, FD: frequency diversity
21/348
The above mentioned outdoor unit configurations must be associated with one of the following indoor unit
configurations:
IDU CONFIGURATION
APPLICATIONS
1+0
classic IDU
Light IDU
Nonprotected
1+0EXT
classic IDU
Light IDU
Nonprotected
1+1 BASIC
PROTECTION
MAIN IDU (classic)

EXTENSION IDU (without
MUX option)
Automatic switching:
selection of the best
receive path and
operational transmitter (in
case of HSB)
1+1 WITH MUX

PROTECTION
MAIN IDU
EXTENSION IDU (with
MUX option)
ACCESS IDU (34 Mbit/s
only
Automatic switching:
selection of the best
receive path and
operational transmitter (in
case of HSB)
Possible to insert
dedicated service channel
extension cards.
Protection of the tributary

access including
redundant muxdemux
2.1.3 ALCATEL 9400 UX features

2.1.3.1 Equipment flexibility
Software controlled frequency:
The infield agility of the 9400 UX is provided on a quarter frequency plan (synthesizer step 250 kHz). Only four
different ODUs maximum are needed to cover the full frequency band.
Figure 2 Subband breakdown

The synthesized, software controlled, RF local oscillator allows easy frequency setting.
Software controlled capacity:
The Alcatel 9400 UX system provides unique capacity agility features, controlled by software up to a maximum
bit rate. This maximum can be adjusted from 2x2 Mbit/s to 16x2 Mbit/s using the appropriate software features
key.
The system capacity can be configured by software to between 2x2 Mbit/s and the maximum authorized by the
software features key.
Moreover, capacity upgrade can be made easily by changing only the software features key.
Transmission power control:
In certain cases, the output power of the equipment has to be decreased, to reduce interference between other
links in case of very short hops. This feature improves the flexibility of the network design and also increases
frequency reutilisation
Different implementations of transmission power control are available depending on the frequency bands:
22/348
At 13 GHz (3CC09297Axxx),15 GHz (3CC08880Axxx and 3CC08978Axxx) and 18 GHz, insertion of

fixed attenuators (of 3, 6 or 10 dB) on transmission side in the IDU.
for the 13 GHz 4QAM (3CC11737Axxx) and the 16QAM (3CC 11736Axxx), a software transmission
power control of 20 dB in 1 dB step can be provided (as a software features key option with classic IDU,
embedded within the Light IDU)
for the 15 GHz 4QAM (3CC12979Axxx), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in 1 dB step
can be provided (as a software features key option with classic IDU, embedded within the Light IDU)
in the millimetric frequency bands (23 to 38 GHz), a software transmission power control of 30 dB in
1 dB step for the 4QAM and of 20 dB in a 1 dB step for the 16 QAM, can be provided (as a software
features key option with classic IDU; embedded within the Light IDU).
for all new generation ODU (ref. A9400 UX flat ODU) frequency bands for the 4 or 16QAM, the software
power transmission control of 30 dB in 1db step can be provided with the software features key.
software features key parameters:
Figure 3 Software features key

The software features key, used with the classic IDU, provides flexibility for the configuration parameters of the
equipment, as well as its options:
maximum configuration definition: 1+0 or 1+1,
maximum capacity definition: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 16x2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbits/s,
authorisation for 16QAM modulation,
setup of transmission frequency range (7 to 40 GHz by default but configurable upon customer specific
request),
authorization for Transmit Power Control option (all bands except 18 GHz),
authorization for Embedded Mediation option (master terminal or slave terminal),
The Light IDU features a fixed embedded configuration (no removable software features key):
maximum configuration: 1+0,
capacity: 2x2 Mbit/s up to 4x2 Mbit/s,
Transmit Power Control option enabled (all bands except 18 GHz),
Link Identity Coding:

The amount of microwave links, especially in urban areas puts the problem of possible interference during
installation and turnon phase.
The digital frame incorporates Link Identity coding capabilities to prevent the capture of an unwanted signal.
2.1.3.2 Ease of installation
The Alcatel 9400 UX systems have been designed to allow quick installation and turnon.
Compact Outdoor Unit:
The Outdoor unit (ODU) is housed in a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 55) container; it is delivered
with a solar shield which provides protection to the outdoor electronics in hot and very sunny climatic zones.
23/348
The Outdoor Unit (1 or 2 depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1) can be rapidly installed on suitable poles
with their own fastening system.
The specific pole mounting is equipped with an accurate alignment system presetting and fine elevation and
bearing tuning to permit easy pointing with the integrated antenna. A very compact pole mounting has been
optimized for 1+0 configuration, it is common to 9400UX from 13 to 38 GHz.
The 9400 UX outdoor unit can be used with an integrated antenna 300 or 600 mm diameter or separate
antennas if a larger diameter is needed.
The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows you to change the ODU without altering the
antenna alignment.
Two ODU generations are available. The new generation ODU, A9400 UX flat ODU, is lighter than the previous
range from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203*. It is 4 and 16QAM compatible and software configurable only.
* xx is for the band frequency of the Outdoor unit. For example, a unit referenced 9413UXR204 depends on the
13GHz frequency band
ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202

or 94xxUXR203
ODU A9400 UX flat ODU
Figure 4 Installation of the ODU

The alignment of the antenna can be easily performed with the use of a dedicated service kit. This kit , when
connected to the ODU, is able to show the reception signal level and provide the connection to the other end
of the link through a telephone service channel (when applicable).
Different IDU mechanical versions:
The small size of the 19 IDU (classic or light) 1U high for all capacities, depth 235mm allows for easy
installation in standard 19 racks and saves a lot of space where space is limited like in shelters or base stations
in cellular or LMDS networks.
The 19 IDU can also be installed as a desktop unit.
Figure 5 Light 19 IDU

Single coaxial cable:
A single coaxial cable of up to 300 m connects the ODU and the IDU, so that a high flexibility is left for locating
the radio and antenna.
24/348
Simple commissioning:
All the standard Site Acceptance Tests can be done with a single PC to commission the link, making extensive
use of builtin supervision features:
continuous performance check and alarm status overview,
numerous baseband loopback facilities,
2.1.3.3 Equipment software features

The Alcatel 9400 UX terminal provides a F interface to a Craft Terminal (PC), which enables alarm monitoring,
quality measurement, and configuration of the equipment.
The Alcatel 9400 UX Network Element (NE) supports a basic group of applications, listed hereafter, which
provide simplified testing, operation and maintenance of the equipment:
Installation and Operation parameters:
Alarm, Status and Control:
Possibility to activate or inhibit alarm indications,
Possibility to configure alarms with different severity levels,
The software displays a synthesis of the monitored alarms (which are also available via dry loops).
Possibility to set threshold values at which the alarms are triggered.
Performance Monitoring G784:
The remote inventory is used to read the information allowing a complete identification of the
selected Network Element (Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit): serial number, date of manufacture,
reference and revision index of the hardware and software releases.
Maintenance Memory:
Link quality monitoring : Background Block Errors, Errored Seconds, Severely Errored Seconds,
Unavailable Seconds.
Remote inventory:
Configuration of: capacity, Link Identity Code, Tx & Rx frequencies, output power (if available
through software),
The maintenance memory application allows the display of the last dated alarms stored in the
equipment when the Craft Terminal is not connected.
Power measurements:
This application is used to take measurements on various measurement points and displays them
on the screen: min Rx power, current Rx power, etc..
2.1.3.4 Network Management

The network management solutions proposed are based on an advanced concept offering the following
advantages :
Network Element Synthesis view:
The management system offers a Network Element Synthesis view, displaying in real time the synthesis of the
alarms of each supervised network element. This feature allows very quick and efficient troubleshooting.
Network Element view:
Each superevised NE can be managed in a dedicated Network Element view allowing easy configuration and
supervision of the NE.
25/348
2.1.4 Capacity configurations

2.1.4.1 Classic IDU version
The capacity configurations depend:
on the type of line interface units (LAU and LIU) installed in the IDU(s),
the software features key used.
The table below summarizes the capabilities according to the bit rates supported by the IDU of the equipment
and the type of software features key used.
BIT RATES SUPPORTED BY SOFTWARE FEATURES KEY
IDU TYPE
4x2
8x2
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s
4x2 Mbit/s
8x2 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s
16 x 2
34
34 Mbit/s + 2
Mbit/s auxiliary
2.1.4.2 Light IDU versions

The Light IDU versions cover the following bit rates (software configured):
2x2 Mbit/s,
4x2 Mbit/s.
2.1.5 Typical hardware configurations
1+0 configuration
integrated antenna
1+0 configuration with separate antenna
1+1 HSB or frequency diversity configuration with two antennas
26/348
1+1 HSB configuration

using an HSB coupler and integrated antenna
1+1 HSB configurations with

multiplexer protection
or
The block diagrams representing the main configurations appear in Figures 6 to 9 on the following pages.
27/348
2.2
Operation
2.2.1 1+0 configuration

A block diagram of this configuration is given:
in figure 6 for the classic IDU version,
in figure 7 for the Light IDU versions.
MAIN INDOOR UNIT

DC
Power supply
OUTDOOR UNIT
Multiplexing and control

unit
(MCU)
Modem
IF
block
Local loop
Tributaries
1 to 16
One 2Mbit/s aux.
bit stream
(only at 34Mbit/s)
Tributary interface
(LIU)
Tributary ports
(LAU)
Feature
key
Cable
Cable
interface
RF
equip.
Antenna
Attenuator
Power supply
unit
EXT
Service
kit
F Tel.
Back to TS/TC
back alarms
NMS
ESC
(Supervision
3/4/5
bus)
Equipment not included in

the standard configuration
but sold as options
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
Figure 6 Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (classic IDU version)
INDOOR UNIT
DC
Tributaries
1 to 4
Power supply
OUTDOOR UNIT
Multiplexing and control

unit
(MCU Light)
Tributary ports
Tributary interface
TS/TC
NMS
(Supervision alarms
bus)
ESC3
Modem &
Monitoring
Cable
Cable
interface
Light
Service kit
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
IF
block
RF
equip.
Local loop
Attenuator
Antenna
Power supply
unit
Functions set up in the

MCU Light board
Equipment not included in
the standard configuration
but sold as options
(SNMP)
Figure 7 Block diagram of a 1+ 0 station (Light IDU versions)
28/348
2.2.1.1 Operation of the main IDU (InDoor Unit) (classic IDU version)
The Line Access Units (LAU) offer all the passive functions required to provide transmission and reception
G.703 interfaces for the tributaries and 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (when there is one). This mainly entails
impedance matching. Two types of board can be used:
LAU 3CC06059Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries (two boards of this type are used for the
16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration),
LAU 3CC06061Axxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
The LIU (Line Interface Unit) boards provide all the active functions required for transmission and reception
mode G.703 interfacing of tributaries and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (mainly HDB3 HCMOS code
conversion). The LIU boards are daughter boards that plug into the MCU board. Three types of board can be
used:
LIU 3CC05818Axxx: four ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,
LIU 3CC06026Axxx: eight ports for 2 Mbit/s tributaries,
LIU 3CC06119Axxx: eight port extension unit, used in conjunction with the eight port LIU board,
3CC06026Axxx, for the 16 x 2 Mbit/s configuration,
LIU 3CC06118AAxx: one port for 34 Mbit/s + one 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
The Multiplexing and Control Unit (MCU) handles:

multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to assemble the aggregate for transmission and restore the
tributaries from the received aggregate,
dropping/insertion of engineering service channels (up to 5) and the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (when
there is one):
ESC N1: reserved for the supervision channel,
ESC N2: telephone channel with selective calling,
ESC N3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,
ESC N4 and N5: V.11 64 kbit/s interfaces (not available for the 2 x 2 Mbit/s rate),
connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC.
processing of external commands: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),
control of the outdoor unit,
interfacing with the outdoor unit, for:
power feed to the ODU,
transmitting and receiving the aggregate,
transmitting and receiving ODU supervision function transmission and reception,
telephone ESC transmission and reception between the IDU and the ODU,
storage of events in batteryassured maintenance memory.
The Power Supply Unit (PSU) is available in two versions, 24 V or 48 V DC floating, for primary power supplies.
It provides DC/DC conversion to generate the necessary voltages required to operate the indoor unit and the
primary power supply voltage of the outdoor unit.
29/348
2.2.1.2 Operation of the Light IDU versions

The Light MCU (Light Multiplexing and Control Unit) handles:
all passive functions (mainly impedance matching) and active functions (mainly HDB3 CMOS code
conversion) needed for transmission and reception mode G.703 interfacing of the four tributaries,
multiplexing/demultiplexing functions, to create the aggregate to be transmitted and recreate the

tributaries from the received aggregate,
engineering service channel drop and insert functions:
ESC N1: reserved for the supervision channel,
ESC N3: V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s interface,
connection of local supervision system, for connecting a supervision PC. To operate the LUX50
software, additional SIMM memory must be added (option sold by reference 9400UXB267).
processing of external controls: telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC),
control of the Outdoor unit,
interfacing with the Outdoor unit for:
transmission and reception of the aggregate,
transmission and reception of ODU supervision channels,
ODU power feed.
For the Light IDU, the types of power supply available are:
19 Light IDU: 24 V DC or 48 V DC floating (This version is a low power consumption version,
allowing the operation of the Light IDU without fans).
2.2.1.3 IDU/ODU cable
A coaxial cable, only available in 50 ohm impedance version, with a maximum length of 300 meters (when of
standard type), connects the IDU to the ODU. This carries:
the digital data streams between the IDU and the ODU, comprising:
30/348
the aggregate obtained from tributary multiplexing,
the ODU control signals,
in the case of a classic IDU, the IDU/ODU telephone channel (connected to ESC N2).
the ODUs primary DC power supply voltage.
2.2.1.4 OutDoor Unit (ODU) operation

The reference of the outdoor unit depends on the frequency band.
The cable interface handles:
reception and transmission of the data streams,
separation of the signals and the power supply voltage to feed the units subsystems,
the interface for the aggregate for transmission or reception with the modem.
The Modem (modulator/demodulator) function receives the aggregate from the cable interface and processes
the baseband signal for microwave transmission by 4QAM or 16QAM modulation, as follows:
in transmission:
digital filtering and error correction coding (FEC),
digital/analogue conversion of bit streams I and Q from the encoding function;
in reception:
a part of the automatic gain control (AGC) function,
analogue/digital conversion of the I and Q bit streams from the demodulation function.
It interfaces with the IF unit for the transmission and reception of the I and Q bit streams.
The IF block handles modulation and demodulation of the aggregate, using the following functions:
in transmission:
analogue filtering of the I and Q bit streams (two filters that can be switched according to capacity),
4QAM or 16QAM modulation of an IF carrier, according to the frequency plan adopted, generated
by a local internal oscillator,
level amplification and tuning (AGC), based on measurement of the rms power output from the
block;
in reception:
amplification, with AGC, of the received signal, transposed via the reception system according to
the frequency plan adopted,
demodulation of the signal, so that the I and Q bit streams can be recovered,
amplification and analogue filtering of the bit streams (two filters that can be switched according
to capacity),
amplification, with AGC, before transmission of the I and Q bit streams to the Modem board.
The transmission mixer transposes the intermediate frequency to a microwave frequency. Frequency agility
is obtained by a synthesized local oscillator (LO).
The transmission RF signal is then transmitted to the power amplifier, monitored by an output power slaving
device and a circuit for cutting off carrier transmission if a fault is detected in the transmission circuits.
31/348
For the 11 GHz,13 GHz and the 23 to 38 GHz frequency bands, the transmitted power can be adjusted in 1 dB
steps by software configuration (software key option needed), within a range of:
20 dB from nominal output power for 11 and13 GHz (94xxUXR202 and 94xxUXR203),
30 dB from nominal output power for 15, 23, 25, 38 GHz (4QAM RTPC),
20 dB from nominal output power for 23, 25, 38 GHz (94xxUXR203 16QAM).
30 dB from nominal output power for all frequency bands of the ODU 9400UX flat ODU.
For the 11, 13, 15 and 18 GHz frequency bands (without RTPC option), attenuators can be inserted on the
transmission output (optional).
The reception RF signal from the branching filter is applied to the RF reception circuit, comprising a cascaded
RF low noise amplifier (except at 38 GHz), a mixer and an IF amplifier. The mixer, which receives the amplified
RF frequency, transposes the RF signal to a reception IF signal using the same LO as the transmission mixer.
When amplified, the signal is sent to the IF blocks reception circuits for demodulation.
The branching filter comprises a duplexed filter for separating the transmission and reception RF signals
present at the antenna port. It can accommodate the RF loopback (94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 and
94xxUXR203, and included into A9400UX flat ODU), which uses a conversion stage for converting transmission
and reception frequencies for test purposes.
The PSU receives the primary voltage from the IDU via the link cable and, from it, generates the voltages
required to operate the subsystems of the Outdoor unit.
2.2.1.5 ESC extension configuration
This extension, available only in the classic IDU version, can be used to customize ESC N3 and N4 and
5 as detailed in 2.3. It requires the presence of an extension IDU with a dedicated SCU (Service Channel Unit)
board.
2.2.2 Basic 1+1 configuration

This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.
It comprises (Figure 8) a main IDU (identical to the one in the 1+0 configuration), an extension IDU and two
ODUs.
The extension unit contains a Service Channel Unit (SCU) which handles the following functions:
user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,
control of the second ODU,
interface with the second ODUs link cable.
The MCU of the main unit sends the aggregate to be transmitted to the SCU and receives the reception
aggregate from it. The MCU is responsible, in reception, for switching between the normal and standby
channels.
There are three configurations:
Hot Standby (HSB), one antenna port
Hot Standby, two antenna ports
Frequency diversity.
32/348
DC
Tributaries
1 to 16
One 2 Mbit/s aux. bit
stream (only at 34
Mbit/s)
MAIN INDOOR UNIT
Feature
key F Tel.
NMS
(Supervision
bus)
Back
to
back
OUTDOOR
UNIT
Cable
TS/TC
alarms
To
coupler
or
Antenna
Service
kit
ESC EXT
3/4/5
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
DC
EOW3
EOW4
OUTDOOR
UNIT
Cable
EXTENSION INDOOR UNIT
EOW5
Equipment not included in the standard configuration but sold as options
To
coupler
or
Antenna
Service
kit
Figure 8 Block diagram of 1+1 station

2.2.2.1 HSB configuration with one antenna port
The two ODUs are connected by an HSB coupler which provides a 10 dB attenuation on the standby channel.
In addition, by design, the standby amplifiers power is:
reduced by 15 dB for the ODU which does not permit an output power control,
cut off for the ODU which permits the output power control.
The HSB switching of a transmitter is based on detection of a fault which can originate from a failure:
of the cable interface,
of the ODU power supply,
of the transmission IF synthesizer,
of the RF synthesizer,
of the amplifier.
The system switches back to the normal channel automatically as soon as it is disconnected and reconnected
again without alarm (because of imbalance in the system), in transmission and in reception.
Switching can also be remotely controlled, by manually switching to the standby channel. The remote control
for cutting off transmission power does not cause a switchover.
2.2.2.2 HSB configuration with two antenna ports
This configuration uses either a double polarization antenna or two antennas (in this case, it also adds space
diversity). One system sends (the standby transmitter is cut off). Operation is the same as in the previous
configuration, apart from the switching, in which reversibility is not required because the link budgets are
identical for both channels.
2.2.2.3 Frequency diversity configuration
The two ODUs send the aggregate simultaneously at two different frequencies. The MCU chooses the best of
the two signals on reception. This configuration also uses two antenna ports.
33/348
2.2.3 1+1 configuration with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection

This configuration is available only in the classic IDU version.
It can be used (see Figure 9) to protect the link from failures of the MCU board in the main IDU. It comprises:
a main IDU, as in the 1+0 configuration but whose tributaries are configured in high impedance.
an extension IDU.
an access IDU.
two ODUs.
DC
MAIN INDOOR UNIT
Tributaries
1 to 16
ACCESS
INDOOR
UNIT
2 Mbit/s
auxiliary (only at
34 Mbit/s)
2 Mbit/s
auxiliary bit
stream
(only at 34
Mbit/s)
Feature
F Tel.
key
Tributaries
1 to 16
Cable
Back to TS/TC
NMS back alarms
(Supervision
bus)
OUTDOOR
UNIT
To
coupler
or
Antenna
Service
kit
ESC EXT
3/4/5
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
DC
Tributaries
1 to 16
Cable
OUTDOOR
UNIT
To
coupler
or
Antenna
2 Mbit/s auxiliary
(only at 34 Mbit/s
EOW3
EOW4
EOW5
Service
kit
Figure 9 Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection
34/348
DC
MAIN INDOOR UNIT
Tributaries
1 to 16
2 Mbit/s aux.
(only at 34
Mbit/s)
Feature
key F
Tributaries 1 to 16
Cable
Back to TS/TC
back alarms
Tel.
NMS
(Supervision
bus)
OUTDOOR
UNIT
To
coupler
or
Antenna
Service
kit
VDS EXT
3/4/5
Alcatel or
Customer
OS
(SNMP)
DC
Tributaries
1 16
Cable
OUTDOOR
UNIT
To
coupler
or
Antenna
2 Mbit/s aux.
(only at 34
Mbit/s)
EOW3
EOW4
EOW5
Service
kit
Figure 10 Block diagram of a 1+1 station with multiplexer protection without access unit
The extension IDU contains the same LAU and LIU boards as the main IDU, configured in high impedance,
plus an SCU board to handle the following functions:
hitless switching on reception,
user interfaces for ESCs 3 to 5,
customization of ESCs 3 and 4 by the addition of daughter boards (see 2.3),
control of the second ODU,
interfacing for the second ODUs link cable.
The MCU boards of the main IDU and the SCU board of the extension IDU exchange the aggregates sent and
received.
The access IDU contains a dedicated LAU combination board which handles:
in transmission, distribution of the tributary signals to the main and extension IDUs,
in reception, transmission of the tributary signals from the active IDU.
All the basic 1+1 configurations are also available in 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection (refer to
2.2.2.1 to 2.2.2.3).
35/348
2.3
Engineering service channels
The equipment comprises:

in the classic IDU configuration: five engineering service channels (ESC N1 to ESC N5), except
in the 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration (only three ESC).
in the Light IDU configuration: two engineering service channels (ESC N1 and ESC N3).
In the main classic IDU and in the Light IDU, the characteristics of these engineering service channels are
predefined.
The extension IDU (classic IDU version) can be used to customize ESC N3, N4 and N5. This unit has a SCU
board installed with daughter boards to customize ESC N3 and N4.
The table below summarizes the ESC options available according to whether the configuration includes a main
IDU (classic, Light) or a classic main IDU with an extension IDU.
ESC
1+0 CONFIGURATION
WITH Light IDU
1+0 BASIC CONFIGURATION

WITH classic IDU
OTHER CLASSIC IDU

CONFIGURATIONS
ESC N1
Supervision
Supervision
Supervision (1)
Telephone with selective

calling
Telephone with selective calling (1)
ESC N2
Depending on daughter board used: (3)

64 kbit/s point-to-point, codirectional G.703
interface, ref.: 3CC05710AAxx
Four-wire analogue, 600 ohms,
ref.: 3CC05711AAxx
ESC N3
V11 or V28 64 kbit/s
V11 or V28 64 kbit/s (2)
64 kbit/s point-to-point, V11 or V28

ref.: 3CC05712AAxx
Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s or
2 x 4800 bit/s), V11 point-to-point or pointto-multipoint (three-way coupler),
ref.: 3CC05713AAxx
Digital asynchronous (1 x 9600 bit/s max.
or 2 x 4800 bit/s max.), V28 point-to-point
or point-to-multipoint (three-way coupler),
ref.: 3CC06482AAxx
ESC N4
(Bit rate
> 2x2 Mbit/s)
64 kbit/s V11 (2)
As ESC N 3 (3)
ESC N5
(Bit rate
> 2x2 Mbit/s)
64 kbit/s V11 (2)
64 kbit/s V11 or V28 (3)
(1) Access on main IDU.

(2) Access on main IDU if there is no extension IDU.
(3) Access on extension IDU.
36/348
2.3.1 ESC number 1

ESC N1 supports the bus reserved for supervision. The bus is implemented between the stations by a radio
link (channel 1 and channel X in a 1+1 configuration) and is available in the stations, at connectors NMS1 and
NMS2, for setting up point-to-multipoint links (Figure 11).
STATIONA
TERMINALA1
NMS1
NMS2
STATIONB
TERMINALB1
NMS1
STATIONC
TERMINALB2
NMS2
NMS1
NMS2
cable
3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
cable
3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
NMS1
NMS2
STATIOND
TERMINALB3
NMS1
TERMINALC1
NMS2
TERMINALD1
NMS1
NMS2
Figure 11 Supervision links

With the 946LUX50 software, 254 up to 65534 addresses are available when the subnetwork is chosen in
class B. Two terminals in the same network should not have the same IP address.
Since many configurations are possible, it is recommended that you contact Alcatel for the network
configuration.
Supervision
With
946LUX50
software
NMS2
Routing
NMS1
Radio
MSU1
Each port is enabled or disabled in the system software (IP Configuration(see 4.8.2.3): MSU1 radio
inputs/outputs, NMS1 and NMS2 cables.
NMS1 NMS2
Figure 12 Supervision bus continuity
2.3.2 ESC number 2

Engineering service channel N2 is a telephone channel with selective calling available only in the classic
IDU version. The handset is connected to the
connector on the main IDU. Each terminal is
assigned a call number between 011 and 999 (not including X00) on installation. The number 00 is for general
calling. Two terminals in the network should not have the same telephone number. ESC N2 is available
(Figure 13):
in digital form, at the BACK TO BACK connector of the main IDU, for digital transfers in stations with
two terminals back-to-back.
in analogue form, at the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 connectors of the main IDU, for setting up a
point-to-multipoint link,
37/348
STATIONA
BACK TO BACK
TERMINALA2
TERMINALB1
BACK TO BACK
Digital link
cable 3CC08729AAxx
9400UXC333
TERMINALB2
BACK TO BACK
AUDIO1
Analogue link
cable 3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
TERMINALA1
STATIONB
AUDIO2
BACK TO BACK
Digital link
cable 3CC08729AAxx
9400UXC333
TERMINALB3
AUDIO1
STATIONC
TERMINALC1
AUDIO2
Figure 13 Telephone ESC
2.3.3 ESC numbers 3 and 4

2.3.3.1 Without extension IDU
If there is no extension IDU:
ESC N3 is a V11 or V28 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel,
ESC N4 is a V11 point-to-point 64 kbit/s channel (not applicable to the Light IDU versions).
The V11 or V28 equipment connects to the ESC. EXT. connector of the main IDU.
2.3.3.2 With extension IDU (not applicable to the Light IDU versions)
With an extension IDU, the ESCs can be digital (G.703 or V11/V28 64 kbit/s, V11 or V28 9.6 or 4.8 kbit/s) or
analogue (four-wire telephone channel + TTL interface of RON/TRON type), point-to-point or
point-to-multipoint. The ESCs are customized by daughter boards described in 7.9.
POINT-TO-POINT ESC
Connection for the ESC equipment:
ESC N3: to the ESC 3-1 connector of the extension IDU.
ESC N4: to the ESC 4-1 connector of the extension IDU.
Connection of two terminals back-to-back: each of the terminals must have an extension IDU with an ESC board
of the same type. The link is set up by a cable linking ports ESC 3-1 (ESC N3) and ESC4-1 (ESC N4) on
the extension IDUs of the two terminals.
38/348
POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT ESC
This type of ESC can be used only for asynchronous digital links.
Connection for the ESC equipment:
ESC N3: to connectors ESC 3-1 and ESC3-2 of the extension IDU,
ESC N4: to connectors ESC 4-1 and ESC4-2 of the extension IDU.
The connection of the terminals for ESC N3 is illustrated in Figure 14. The connection principles are the same
for ESC N4, replacing ESC 3-1 with ESC 4-1 and ESC 3-2 with ESC 4-2.
STATION A
TERMINALA1
STATION B
MAIN
IDU
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
TERMINALB1
TERMINALB2
MAIN
IDU
MAIN
IDU
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT.
ESC 31
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT.
ESC EXT.
ESC 31 ESC 32
ESC 31 ESC 32
STATION C
TERMINALC1
MAIN
IDU
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT.
ESC 31
Baseband link
cable 3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
ASYNC.
V.28 EQUIP.
ASYNC.
V.28 EQUIP.
STATION D
TERMINAL D1
Baseband link
Cable 3CC07711AAxx
9400UXC332
TERMINALB3
MAIN
IDU
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
MAIN
IDU
ESC. EXT.
3CC07157AAxx
9400UCX130
ESC. MAIN
ESC EXT.
ESC 31 ESC 32
ESC EXT.
ESC 31
ASYNC.
V.28 EQUIP.
Figure 14 Point-to-multipoint engineering service channel ESC3
2.3.4 ESC number 5

Channel not available in the Light IDU versions.
2.3.4.1 Without extension IDU
As ESC N4.
2.3.4.2 With extension IDU
ESC N5 can only be a V11 or V28 point-to-point link.
Connection of the ESC equipment: to connector ESC 5 of the extension IDU.
Connection of two terminals back-to-back to form a repeater station: each of the terminals must have an
extension IDU with an ESC board of the same type. The link is implemented by a cable connecting the ESC 5
ports of the extension IDUs of the two terminals.
39/348
2.4
Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC)
The equipment has:
Two loops preassigned for Service affecting alarm (SA), and Non-service affecting alarm (NSA)
states. Each alarm generated by the equipment can be classified as Critical, Major, Minor, Warning,
Indeterminate, or Cleared by the supervisory software.
A remote control loop, available to the user.

The three contacts of this loop (common, N/C and N/O) are accessible:
on the ALARM. I/O connector of the main classic IDU,
on the ESC 3/ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU,
The loop formed by the common and normally closed contacts is normally closed (in the
absence of an alarm condition or remote control).
eight housekeeping alarms (remote indications via dry loops), available to the user. The remote
indication loops are configured as normally open and can be configured as normally closed, depending
on the setting of the swaps on the MCU board, as described in 7.10.1. A name can be assigned to
each loop, in the software, on installation. These loops are available:
on the ALARM. I/O connector of the main classic IDU,
on the ESC 3/ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU unit,

Housekeeping loop,
normally open (in the
absence of an alarm condition)
EQUIPMENT
Relay position in the
absence of an alarm
condition or remote
control
Normally open
Common
Normally closed
0.5 A / 100 V
dry loops
EQUIPMENT
CHOICE
Housekeeping loop
normally closed (in the
absence of an alarm)
REMOTE CONTROL
AND ALARMS
REMOTE INDICATIONS
Figure 15 Remote control, alarms and remote indications
2.5
Loopback options
The loopback options are provided on the active channel to facilitate commissioning and maintenance
operations. Figure 16 shows the positioning of the loops according to the configuration.
Each local loop loops the aggregate:
at the output of the main IDU , and the extension IDU ,
at the input of the main ODU and the extension ODU , to check the cable link between the IDU
and the ODU (this command cuts off output power),
at the output of the main ODU and the extension ODU if the RF loopback option has been
selected (the RF loop cuts transmission).
40/348
CAUTION:
A local loop disconnects the link and isolates it from the network.
The RF loopback configuration requires the remote transmitter to be cut off.
2
Aggregate
MUX
To antenna
ODU
IDU PRINCIPAL
Tributaries
1
1+0 CONFIGURATION (classic IDU, Light IDU)
2
Aggregate
MUX
To antenna
To antenna
ODU1
IDU PRINCIPAL
Tributaries
1
4
Aggregate
EXTENSION IDU
ODUX
1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION (classic IDU)

2
Aggregate
MAIN IDU
MUX
To antenna
To antenna
To antenna
To antenna
ODU1
1
4
Active MUX
Aggregate
Tributaries
ODUX
EXTENSION IDU
MUX
Inactive MUX
BASIC HSB 1+1 CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU) without access unit
2
Aggregate
MAIN IDU
MUX
ACCESS IDU
ODU1
1
4
Active MUX
Aggregate
Tributaries
ODUX
EXTENSION IDU
MUX
Inactive MUX
BASIC 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION (classic IDU)
Figure 16 Locations of local loops
41/348
MAIN IDU
ODU
ODU
MAIN IDU
BER analyzer
Local station
Remote
loopback
Remote station
Figure 17 Checking a hop using the remote loop option
The remote loop remote control function must be executed on the remote station.
Remote loopback can be used in a stations IDU to loop the receive output of a tributary to its transmit input.
This way, you can use a BER analyzer connected to the local station to check out a hop (Figure 17).
!
2.6
Before setting up a loop, you must assign identical link identity codes for both
transmit and receive directions to avoid generating an alarm condition.
Equipment management
After installing and commissioning the equipment, the configuration parameters (bit rate, frequency, power, etc.)
are saved in the equipment.
The configuration is saved in two memories, one located in the IDU, the other in the ODU.
On power up, the microprocessor responsible for administering the equipment compares the content of the two
memories:
if the contents are identical, it loads their content into the various modules of the IDU and the ODU, and
switches the equipment to operational mode,
if the contents are different:

On the IDU, the three URG, NURG and ATT LEDs (see 2.7) on the front panel of the main
IDU flash simultaneously. The equipment waits for the IDU-ACO ODU button on the main IDU to
be pressed to select a configuration to download.
Note : A configuration is valid if one of the two IDU or ODU leds is lighted.
The default configuration is obtained by attempting to load the configuration of equipment that is not included
(for example, disconnect the ODU, power up the IDU and choose to download the ODU configuration when the
LEDs are flashing at the same time). You must then reload the entire equipment configuration from the CT.
Note : When the IDU and ODU leds are off, then the equipment starts automatically in default
configuration.
42/348
2.7
IDU controls, indications and connectors
The indoor units have a Connector panel and an Operation panel (Figure 18). The operation panel carries
controls and indicators which duplicate those on the Connector side. The tables in the sections that follow
describe these components.
In some configurations, some of the items described below may be omitted.
2.7.1 Classic main IDU

Ground terminal
Connector panel of the main IDU
Front panel of the main IDU
Figure 18 Controls, indicators and connectors on the main IDU

The connector panel of the main IDU is fitted with:
indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,
connectors.
The components are listed in the table below.
ITEM
TYPE
FUNCTION
Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.

Red LED
URG: Service Affecting alarm present.
Red LED
NURG: Non- service affecting alarm present.
Yellow LED
ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.
Yellow LED
BZ: Busy (telephone ESC busy).
Green LED
IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid.
Green LED
ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid.
ON/OFF
Two-position
switch
For powering the unit up/down.

The green LED beneath this switch indicates when the unit is powered up.
RST
Pushbutton
Resets the units software.
IDU-ACO/ODU
Momentary action two-position

switch
On startup: selects the IDU or ODU configuration if the

configuration data is lost
In operation: ACknOwledge (acknowledgement of an urgent
alarm)/test the LEDs.
43/348
ITEM
I/O (1/8)*
I/O (9-16)*
DC 24V-48V *
TYPE
Female
37-pin sub-D
connectors
Male
3-pin sub-D
connector
RJ11
connector
FUNCTION
2 Mbit/s port version:
Tributaries 1 to 16.
34 Mbit/s port version:
34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets mounted on a plate
installed in place of the top I/O (9/16) connector.
Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).
ESC telephone handset port.
AUDIO 1 *
AUDIO 2 *
Female
9-pin sub-D
connector
Interface for ESC N2 (4-wire telephone channel + E/M signalling).

A buzzer alerts the operator if a call is received over the telephone
channel.
ESC. EXT. *
Female
37-pin sub-D
connector
Link with ESC MAIN connector on the extension IDU for

customizing ESCs 3, 4 and 5.
Interface for ESCs 3, 4 and 5 if there is no extension unit.
ALARM. I/O *
Female
25-pin sub-D
connector
Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC).
NMS 1 *
NMS 2 *
Female
9-pin sub-D
connector
Local supervision network interfaces.
F*
Female
9-pin sub-D
connector
Supervisory PC interface for use with F interface adapter cable.
Female
9-pin sub-D
connector
Connector for the software feature key according to the configuration, enabling the equipment to operate (must be fitted).
Also used for maintenance (factory tests).
SKU/MTN
EXT
Female
68-pin mini-D
connector
Link with the extension units MAIN connector.
BACK TO BACK
Female
50-pin mini-D
connector
Link with the corresponding connector on the other directions main

IDU.
ODU
Female N
connector
Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective spark gap.
* Connectors with pinout details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.
44/348
2.7.2 Light IDU

The Light IDU version has only a Connector panel (Figure 19) with:
switches and a software reset button,
display components for ascertaining the operational state of the equipment at a glance,
connector ports.
It is equipped with the items listed in the table below.
Figure 19 Controls, indicators and connectors on the Light IDU

ITEM
TYPE
ODU
Female N
connector
Link with the ODU. This connector includes a protective surge arrestor.
Red LED
URG: Service Affecting alarm present
Red LED
NURG: NonService Affecting alarm present
FUNCTION
Yellow LED
ATT: Alarm attended, not used with LUX50.
Yellow LED
MAN: Remote control indicator
Green LED
IDU: No IDU alarm or IDU configuration is valid
Green LED
ODU: No ODU alarm or ODU configuration is valid
F*
Female 9pin
SubD connector
Interface with supervisory PC for use with F interface adapter cable
NMS 1 *
Female 9pin
SubD connectors
Supervision network bus interfaces.
I/O 1-4 *
Female 37pin
SubD connector
Tributaries 1 to 4
ESC 3 /
ALARM I/O *
Female 37pin
SubD connector
ESC N 3 interface
Remote controls and telesignalling (TS/TC)
NMS 2 *
IDU-ACO/ODU
Momentary action
twoposition switch
On startup: select the IDU or ODU configuration if the configuration is

lost
In operation: ACknOwledge (Acknowledgement of urgent alarms/LED

test).
RST
Pushbutton
Software reset.
DC 48V or 24V *
Male 3pin SubD

connector
Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V DC).
ON/OFF
Stable twoposition
switch
For powering the unit up/down

The green LED to the left of this switch indicates that the unit is powered up.
* Connectors with pinout details in section 3 and in Appendix 6.
45/348
2.7.3 Extension IDU
Extension IDU connector panel
Extension IDU operation panel
Figure 20 Extension IDU controls, indicators and connectors

The connector panel of the extension IDU is fitted with:
indicators showing the operational status of the equipment at a glance,
connectors.
In the first three columns of the table below, a cross indicates the presence of the components according to the
type of extension unit:
Type A : ESC extension unit.
Type B : 1+1 extension unit with no multiplexer protection.
Type C : 1+1 extension unit with multiplexer protection.
A B C
ITEM
X X
TYPE
FUNCTION
Items shown on a shaded background appear on both panels.

Yellow LED
MAN: Indicates that a remote control has been sent to the

equipment from a supervisory PC. The LED remains on
until the remote control disappears.
Green LED
TX-ODU: transmission traffic on standby ODU.
Green LED
IDU: No alarms on extension IDU.
Green LED
T-IDU: Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexer.
Green LED
RX-ODU: reception traffic on standby ODU.
Green LED
ODU: No alarms on standby ODU.
ON/OFF
Two-position
switch
For powering the unit up/down.

The green LED beneath this switch indicates when the
unit is powered up.
RST
Pushbutton
Resets the units software.
ACCESS (1-8)
ACCESS (9-16)
Female
37-pin sub-D
connector
Link with access units EXT. (1/8) and EXT. (9/16) connectors.
X X X
DC 24V-48V *
Male
3-pin sub-D
connector
Primary power supply input (24 V or 48 V).
X X X
ESC. MAIN
Female
37-pin sub-D
connector
Link with the main IDUs ESC EXT connector for ESC
extension.
X X X
X X
X
46/348
A B C
ITEM
TYPE
X X X
MAIN
Female
68-pin mini-D
connector
Link with the main IDUs EXT connector.
X X X
ESC. 5
Female
25-pin sub-D
connector
Port for ESC N5.
Female
50-pin mini-D
connector
Not used.
X X X BACK TO BACK
FUNCTION
X X X
ESC. 4-1 *
ESC. 4-2 *
Female
9-pin sub-D
connectors
Ports 1 and 2, ESC N4.
X X X
ESC. 3-1 *
ESC. 3-2 *
Female
9-pin sub-D
connector
Ports 1 and 2, ESC N3.
ODU
Female
N connector
Link with the ODU.

This connector includes a protective spark-gap.
C-NMS1
C-NMS2
Female
9-pin and 15-pin
sub-D connectors
X X
Options
Not used.
* Connectors with pinout details in Appendix 6.
2.7.4 Access IDU
Access IDU connector panel
Access IDU front panel
Figure 21 Access IDU connectors
47/348
The connector panel of the access indoor unit is fitted with the components described in the table below:
ITEM
TYPE
I/O (1/8)*
I/O (9/16)*
Female
37-pin sub-D
connector
MAIN (1/8)
MAIN (9/16)
EXT. (1/8)
EXT. (9/16)
Female
37-pin sub-D
connectors
Female
37-pin sub-D
connectors
FUNCTION
2 Mbit/s access version (use of IDU type 1, see 7.2.2.2):
Tributaries 1 to 16.
34 Mbit/s access version:
2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port.
34 Mbit/s ports on 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets on a panel mounted in
place of the top I/O (9/16) connector.
Tributary links 1 to 16 to I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on
the main IDU.
Tributary 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to I/O (1/8) connector on the
main IDU.
Tributary links 1 to 16 to I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on
the main IDU.
Tributary link 34 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s to ACCESS (1/8) connector.
* Customer connectors, with pinout detailed in section 3.
48/348
2.8
Technical characteristics
The values indicated hereafter are typical values.

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND FREQUENCY PLANS
Equipment
Reference
Standard
9411 UX
Band
(GHz)
Frequency
(GHz)
11 GHz
10.711.73
Standard *
Tx/Rx
separation (MHz)
Channeling
530
4QAM/16QAM
EN 301 128
13 GHz 12.7513.25 ERC 1202

ITUR Rec F4976
266
9413 UX
16QAM
EN 301 128
13 GHz 12.7513.25 ERC 1202

ITUR Rec F4976
266
9415 UX
EN 301 128
15 GHz
14.415.35
ERC 1207
ITUR Rec F6363
728,
315, 420, 490
EN 301 128
18 GHz
17.719.7
ERC 1203
ITUR Rec F5953
1008, 1010,
340, 1560, 1092.5
EN 300 198
23 GHz
21.223.6
ERC 1302 annex A

ITUR Rec F6373
1008, 1197,
1200, 1232
EN 300 198
23 GHz
21.223.6
ERC 1302 annex A

ITUR Rec F6373
1008, 1197,
1200, 1232
EN 300 431
25 GHz
24.526.5
ERC 1302 annex B

ITUR Rec F7483
1008
EN 300 431
25 GHz
24.526.5
ERC 1302 annex B

ITUR Rec F7483
1008
9413 UX
4QAM
4QAM/16QAM
9418 UX
4QAM/16QAM
9423 UX
4QAM
9423 UX
16QAM
9425 UX
4QAM
9425 UX
16QAM
28 GHz 27.5429.45
9428 UX
1008
4QAM/16QAM
9438 UX
EN 300 197
38 GHz
3739.5
ERC 1201
ITUR Rec F7491
1260
EN 300 197
38 GHz
3739.5
ERC 1201
ITUR Rec F7491
1260
4QAM
9438 UX
16QAM
(*) consult Alcatel if nonstandard Tx/Rx separations are requested.

(*) consult Alcatel for availability of these options
RF CHANNELING
Capacity (Mbit/s)
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
RF Channeling (MHz)
3.5
14
28
14
(4QAM modulation)
RF Channeling (MHz)
(16QAM modulation)
49/348
INFIELD TUNABILITY RANGE FOR 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Equipment
Max frequency
agility band
depending on
duplex
difference
(MHz)
Output Power
(dBm)
Output Power Setting

option (dB)
9413 UX
116
25
Fixed attenuator: 3, 6, or
10 dB for 3CC08879AAxx
116
25
+25 dBm to 5 dBm with 1 dB

step for 3CC12690AAxx
116
21
+21 dBm to 1 dBm with1 dB

220
21
10 dB for 3CC08880AAxx
220
24
+24 dBm to 6 dBm with 1 dB

480
16
10 dB
4QAM
9413 UX
4QAM RTPC
9413 UX
16QAM
9415 UX
4QAM
9415 UX
4QAM RTPC
9418 UX
24*
4QAM
500
19
+19 to 11 dBm with 1 dB

step
9423 UX
16QAM
500
17
+17 to 3 dBm with 1 dB step
9425 UX
450
18

step
9425 UX
16QAM
450
16

step
9438 UX
560
16

step
560
14
9423 UX
4QAM RTPC
4QAM RTPC
4QAM RTPC
9438 UX
16QAM
(*) consult Alcatel for availability of this option.
50/348
TUNABILITY RANGE FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU

Equipment
Duplex
difference
(MHZ)
Frequency
agility band
(MHz)
Output power
(dBm)
Output power setting (dB)
+ 24
20

step
+ 24
20

step
+ 24
20

step
+ 22
19

step
+ 19

step
+ 16

step
+ 17

step
+ 14

step
+ 16

step
+ 13

step
+ 16

step
+ 13

step
4 QAM
9411 UX
530
16 QAM
250
4 QAM
9413 UX
4 QAM
9415 UX
16 QAM
4 QAM
9418 UX
16 QAM
4 QAM
9423 UX
266
16 QAM
16 QAM
116
315 420
315,
420, 490
490,
728
340,
1008,1010,
1560, 1092.5
220
480
1008, 1197,
1200
1200,
500
1232
4 QAM
9425 UX
16 QAM
1008
450
4 QAM
9428 UX
16 QAM
1008
480
4 QAM
9438 UX
16 QAM
1260
560
TYPICAL BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202 OR

94xxUXR203 in dBm
Equipment
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
103
106
103
106
103
106
103
106
9413 UX 4QAM
95
92
92
89
89
86
86
83
9413 UX 16QAM
83
80
80
77
9415 UX 4QAM
94
91
91
88
88
85
85
82
9418 UX 4QAM
94
91
91
88
88
85
85
82
9423 UX 4QAM
92
89
89
86
86
83
83
80
51/348
Equipment
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
9423 UX 16QAM
82
79
79
76
9425 UX 4QAM
91
88
88
85
85
82
82
79
9425 UX 16QAM
81
78
78
75
9438 UX 4QAM
87
84
84
81
81
78
78
75
9438 UX 16QAM
77
74
74
71
BER THRESHOLDS AT ANTENNA PORT FOR NEW GENERATION A9400UX flat ODU
Equipment
9411 UX
9413 UX
9415 UX
9418 UX
9423 UX
9425 UX
9438 UX
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
103
106
103
106
103
106
103
106
4 QAM
95
92
92
89
89
86
86
83
16 QAM
84
81
81
78
4 QAM
95
92
92
89
89
86
86
83
16 QAM
84
81
81
78
4 QAM
95
92
92
89
89
86
86
83
16 QAM
84
81
81
78
4 QAM
93
90
90
87
87
84
84
81
16 QAM
82
79
79
76
4 QAM
93
90
90
87
87
84
84
81
16 QAM
82
79
79
76
4 QAM
92
89
89
86
86
83
83
80
16 QAM
81
78
78
75
4 QAM
91
88
88
85
85
82
82
79
16 QAM
79
76
77
74
CONFIGURATION
Additional branching losses per terminal *
Tx
Rx
1+0 or1+1 FD
Main Channel
StandBy channel
11
11
(Main & StandBy channels)

1+1 HSB 1 antenna
* : Typical values ODU unit inputs, antenna access
52/348
1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU
94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Equipment
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
103
106
103
106
103
106
103
106
9413 UX 4QAM
120
117
117
114
114
111
111
108
9413 UX 16QAM
104
101
101
98
9415 UX 4QAM
115
112
112
109
109
106
106
103
9415 UX 4 QAM
RTPC
118
115
115
112
112
109
109
106
9418 UX 4QAM
111
108
108
105
105
102
102
99
9423 UX 4QAM
111
108
108
105
105
102
102
99
1+0/1+1 FD SYSTEM GAIN AT ANTENNA PORT (INCLUDING DUPLEXER LOSS) FOR ODU
94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202 OR 94XXUXR203
Equipment
2x2
4x2
8x2
16x2 / 34 + 2
9423 UX 16QAM
99
96
96
93
9425 UX 4QAM
109
106
106
103
103
100
100
97
9425 UX 16QAM
97
94
94
91
9438 UX 4QAM
103
100
100
97
97
94
94
91
9438 UX 16QAM
91
88
88
85
1+0/1+1 System gain At antenna port (including duplexer loss) for A9400UX flat ODU
Equipment
9411 UX
9413 UX
9415 UX
9418 UX
9423 UX
9425 UX
9438 UX
4 QAM
2x2
4x2
8x2
103
106
103
106
103
106
103
106
119
116
116
113
113
110
110
107
104
101
101
98
113
110
110
107
104
101
101
98
113
110
110
107
104
101
101
98
109
106
106
103
101
98
98
95
106
103
103
100
98
95
95
92
103
100
100
97
95
92
92
89
101
98
98
95
92
89
90
87
16 QAM
4 QAM
119
116
116
113
16 QAM
4 QAM
119
116
116
113
16 QAM
4 QAM
115
112
112
109
16 QAM
4 QAM
112
109
109
106
16 QAM
4 QAM
109
106
106
103
16 QAM
4 QAM
16x2 / 34 +2
107
104
104
101
16 QAM
53/348
ANTENNA GAIN ( IN dB , typ GAIN )

Integrated
30 cm
Nonintegrated
60 cm
Flextwist loss
*
11 GHz
>34
13 GHz
60 cm
90 cm
120 cm
180 cm
<tbc>
<tbc>
<tbc>
<tbc>
>35
0.35
>38.3
>41
>44.6
15 GHz
>30.5
>36
0.5
>39.5
>42
>45.5
18 GHz
>32.7
>38
0.7
>41.6
>44
>47.3
23 GHz
>34.4
>39.6
0.7
>43.1
>45.6
>48.9
25 GHz
>35.6
>40.7
0.7
>44.2
>46.8
38 GHz
>39.3
>44.2
* For those referenced in Appendix 9.1 Commercial items
ALCATEL 9400 UX ALL FREQUENCY BANDS

Synthesizer step
250 kHz
RF stability
+/ 10 ppm
Spectrum masks
Compliant with the relevant ETSI standard
Spurious
emissions
Compliant with the ETSI standard
Equalizer Type
7 coefficients (and 19 coefficients for ODU flat)
Link Identity
Code
32 codes
Compliant with ERC Rec 7401
TRIBUTARY INTERFACES*
Type
2 Mbit/s ITUT G.703 120 ohms or 75 Ohms

34 Mbit/s ITUT G.703 75 Ohms
Jitter
ITUT G. 823/ G. 921

ManMachine Interface
Visual
7 LEDs
other
F interface and adapter cable for Personal Computer (WindowsTM)

Interface for Telephone Service Channel (ESC n2 on classic IDU only)
Alarms
Equipment alarms
2 outputs
Environmental
events
8 inputs / 1output
* In the case of a 75 Ohms connection, the respect of the G703 norms and EMC norms is only guaranteed by
ALCATEL if spider adapters made for this purpose are used (3CC07885Axxx or 3CC07759Axxx) with the IDU
configuration.
54/348
POWER SUPPLY
DC
nominal
(primary)
24 VDC
+/ 20 to +/ 40 VDC
48 VDC
+/ 39 to +/ 60 VDC
Polarity
+ or or floating (isolated ground)
Max Power
1+0 : 63W with classic IDU
consumption for
ODU 94XXUXR201,
94XXUXR202 OR
94XXUXR203
1+0 : 50 W with Light IDU
Max Power
1 + 0 : 60 W
consumption for
A9400UX flat ODU
1 + 1 : 112 W
1+1 : 120W
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY / SAFETY

EMC
EN 301 489 1 & 4 (version 1.2.1)
Safety
EN 60 950
Power supply
EN 300 132
Lightning protection
Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU

+/ 1kV on cable ground according to IEC 6100045 with 2 wave types: 1.2/50
s and 10/700 s
IDUODU CABLE
Type
1AC001100022
Fire resistance
IEC 3321
Max length
300 m
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Storage
EN 300 019 class 1.3
Transport
EN 300 019 class 2.3
IDU
EN 300 019 class 3.2

Temperature range : 10 to +55C
Operation
ODU
EN 300 019 class 4.1,

Protection factor IP 55 (IEC529 standard)
Temperature range : 33 to +55C
55/348
MECHANICAL
Classic Main IDU,
Extension IDU, Access IDU
44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19 / 1U)
Light IDU
44x450x235 mm / 3 kg (19 / 1U)
ODU
94XXUXR201
94XXUXR202
94XXUXR203
ODU
A9400UX flat
ODU
13 to 18
GHz
250x250x250 mm / 10kg
23 to 38
GHz
220x220x250 mm / 8 kg
11 to 38
GHz
235x235x72 mm / 4 kg
For the typical installation dimensions, see Chapter 3
56/348
2.9
Frequency agility bands
ALL VALUES EXPRESSED IN MHz FOR A 3.5 MHz CHANNEL.

Equipment
Duplex
difference
Tx
Band
F min
F max
9411 UX
530
10700.00
12950.00
10950.00
11200.00
1P
11230.00
11480.00
2P
11480.00
11730.00
12751.75
12864.25
12861.75
12978.25
1P
13017.75
13130.25
2P
13127.75
13244.25
14502.75
14723.50
14719.75
14940.25
1P
14922.75
15143.25
2P
15139.75
15360.25
14404.75
14632.25
14628.75
14856.25
1P
14894.75
15122.25
2P
15118.75
15346.25
14502.75
14618.25
1P
15230.75
15346.25
14635.75
14765.25
14761.75
14898.25
1P
14950.75
15080.25
2P
15076.75
15213.25
9413 UX
9415 UX
266
420
490
728
315
57/348
Equipment
Duplex difference
Tx
Band
F min
F max
9418 UX
340
18581.75
18698.25
18701.75
18818.25
1P
18921.75
19038.25
2P
19041.75
19158.25
17701.75
18138.25
1P
19261.75
19698.25
17701.75
18199.25
18180.75
18678.25
1P
18711.75
19210.25
2P
19190.75
19698.25
17703.75
18199.25
18182.75
18678.25
1P
18711.75
19207.25
2P
19190.75
19686.25
17727.50
18005.00
18195.00
18580.00
1P
18820.00
19177.50
2P
19287.50
19672.50
1560
1010
1008
1092.5
58/348
Equipment
Duplex difference
Tx
Band
F min
F max
9423 UX
1008
(9423UX R201,
R201
9423UX R202)
22001.75
22490.25
22101.75
22590.25
1P
23009.75
23492.25
2P
23109.75
23598.25
22000.00
22300.00
22300.00
22600.00
1P
23008.00
23308.00
2P
23308.00
23608.00
21201.75
21786.25
21781.75
22366.25
1P
22433.75
23018.25
2P
23013.75
23598.25
21201.75
21818.25
21781.75
22398.25
1P
22401.75
23018.25
2P
22981.75
23598.25
21204.75
21818.25
21784.75
22398.25
1P
22401.75
23015.25
2P
22981.75
23595.25
24549.75
24996.25
24997.75
25444.25
1P
25557.75
26004.25
2P
26005.75
26452.25
37059.75
37616.25
37619.75
38176.25
1P
38319.75
38876.25
2P
38879.75
39436.25
1008
(3DB05532AAAA)
1232
1200
1197
9425 UX
9838 UX
1008
1260
59/348
60/348
3 Installation
3.1
Delivery
When you receive the equipment in its packaging:

Check the condition of the packaging.
If damaged, make your reservations known to the carrier as quickly as possible.
3.1.1 Checking the configuration

The configuration is normally supplied in:
Two packages containing the IDUs and ODUs according to the configuration, with connector manual
and test results book,
one or more packages containing the antennas, HSB coupler and installation accessories, service
telephone, cables, etc.
3.1.1.1 Content of the ODU/IDU boxes

Light IDU
CONFIG.
Nr. of
boxes
1+0
1 or 2
Classic IDU
CONFIG.
Nr. of
boxes
1+0
1 or 2
1+1
1 or 2
1+1 with
MUX
protection
1 or 2
CONTENT
1 Light IDU (19 ) + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit + documentation
CONTENT
1 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation
+ eventually 1 extension IDU.
1 main IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1 connector kit + documentation.
1 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.
1 main IDU and if necessary 1 access IDU + 1 ODU + 1 software feature key + 1
connector kit + documentation.
1 extension IDU + 1 ODU + 1 connector kit.
3.1.1.2 Unpacking
Unpack the equipment according to the instructions on the packaging.
Take an inventory and identity any missing items. If the delivery does not match the delivery advice
note, notify ALCATEL within 48 hours of receipt of the equipment.
Leave the equipment readily accessible during the work.

IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS USED TO SEAL
THE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.
3.1.1.3 Storage
If installation is to be deferred, the type of packaging will define the equipment storage conditions:
cardboard boxes should be warehoused indoors, in a dry, well aired room.
wooden or plywood boxes may be stored outdoors, provided that they are protected from rain and the
suns rays.
61/348
3.2
Labels on the equipment
The labels below are also affixed to the boxes to indicate their contents.
LIGHT IDU LABEL INFORMATION
20 to 40 V=
39 to 60 V =
Power supply voltage

value
Maximum IDU capacity
4x2 Mbit/s
Floating power supply
YES
2 Mbit/s tributary port

impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms
Integrated mediation function
Slave
Cable interface type
DIG: Digital version
Transmitted power control

Remote craft terminal
YES
YES
Address of unit for

supervision bus
Management interface type
Service channel 3 interface
type
Not completed in the factory.

V.11 or V.28
V.11 or V.28
* IDU model/revision index of equipment

see list in Appendix 9
* Serial number
Memory extension
Commercial code: see list in

Appendix 9
UX basic software
9400UXN001
Light UX software
9400UXN002
Edition date
* bar coded and in plain language
DD / MM / YYYY
YES (required for LUX50)
or NO
The configuration depends on the factory delivery.

CLASSIC MAIN IDU LABEL INFORMATION
Power supply
voltage value
20 to 40 V =
39 to 60 V =
Maximum IDU capacity

(according to equipment )
impedance
2 Mbit/s aux bitstream
port impedance
4x2 Mbit/s ; 8x2 Mbit/s

16x2 Mbit/s ; 34+2 Mbit/s
75, 120 ohms, high impedance
(mux protection) or automatic
if any, 75 ohms or 120 ohms
or high impedance
1 or 2
(2 required for LUX50)
ANA : Analog version
DIG : Digital version
V.11 (Meaningless if an extension
or IDU for dedicated SCs is
V.28 used)
not entered in the factory
Memory extension
Cable interface
type
Service channel 3
port type
* bar coded or in plain language

: see list in Appendix 9
* Serial number
IDU
address
for
supervision bus
Audio service channel
phone number
not entered in the factory.
Commercial code
: see list in Appendix 9
62/348
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE EXTENSION IDU

* Reserved for Alcatel
Power supply
voltage value
20 to 40 V =
39 to 60 V =
Maximum IDU
capacity (according to
equipment)

75, 120 ohms, high impedance
(mux protection) or automatic

impedance
Cable
type
interface
ANA : Analog version

DIG : Digital version
64 kbit/s G.703 codirectional
64 kbit/s V.11 or V.28
300-3400 Hz 4 wire
9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.11
9600 / 2 X 4800 bauds, V.28
Service channel 3 port

type + corresponding
commercial code

* Serial number
SC4 port type

corresponding
commercial code
V.11
V.28
SC5 board type
Commercial code
Options as for SC3
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ACCESS IDU

* Reserved for Alcatel
Tributary type

Tributary port impedance
75 ohms
120 ohms
2 Mbit/s auxiliary stream

port impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms

or not applicable (if not
provided )
* IDU model
* Serial number
Commercial code
63/348
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203
Power supply voltage value

Edition date
Transmit power for 15 and 18 GHz
Std = Standard
High= High power
RF local loopback
YES + commerc. code; NO
Duplex difference
for transmission
Min and maxi operating frequencies

Canal
Commercial code
*Industrial code / revision index
* ODU model/revision index
* Serial number
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU
Power supply voltage value
Initial software SW/ICS
ODU Software (when learning factory)
P/N
Commercial code
Min and max operation frequencies for transmission
Duplex difference
Edition date
*Industrial code / revision index
* Serial number
TYPICAL LABEL ON THE HSB (HOT STANDBY) COUPLER
10dB
Coupling value
10 dB
Operating frequency
band
11; 13; 15; 18; 23; 25;

38 GHz
* Unit mode
* Serial number
Commercial code
64/348
SOFTWARE KEY LABEL ON THE BOX

Integrated mediation function:
+ commercial code
ALCATEL 9400 UX
U
Y (yes) + commercial
code or N (no)
1+0 max. or
1+1 max
RCT (remote craft terminal)

Max. configuration
Max bit rate + commercial

code of each software
module
TPC: only for 13, 23 to
38 GHz bands
40 GHz
Master or Slave
2 x2 ; 4 x2 ; 8 x2 ;
16 x 2 ; 34 Mbit/s
Y (yes) + commercial
code or N (no)
Transmit frequency
range
* Model of key /
Revision index
* Serial number of key
Commercial code
SOFTWARE KEY LABELS
Integrated mediation function:

MASTER or SLAVE
Maximum bit rate (Mbit/s) :

2x2
4x2
8x2
16 x 2 *
(*) also for 34 + 2 version
Configuration :
1 + 0 MAX
or 1 + 1 MAX
Remote craft terminal (RCT) :

Y (yes) or N (no)
7 40 GHz
Optional: transmit power

control (TPC)
all bands except 15 and 18 GHz :
Y (yes) or N (no)
TX : Transmit frequency range enabled
Typical label affixed to the software key

Item label
(on other side)
3CC07619AAAA 01
C98085113 (05)
65/348
3.2.1 Typical installation dimensions (1+0 configuration with integrated 1 ft)

3.2.1.1 ODU 94xxUXR201 A 94xxUXR203
Pole mounting 1+1
38
38
38
13
Pole mounting 1+0
244
365
469
545
66/348
3.2.1.2 ODU A9400 UX flat ODU
522
556
Pole mounting 1+1
160
174
625
365
318
389
244
Pole mounting 1+0
545
67/348
3.3
Installing the equipment
It is assumed that the installer has already installed the other peripheral equipment (cable trays, multiplexes,
etc).
3.3.1 Information required for installation

Appendix 2 contains a sheet for you to complete to collate all the general information needed for the installation
procedure.
3.3.2 Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and safety

1) Installation is designed to meet all new requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility and safety.
2) The EMC performance of the equipment depends largely on installation practices (cable installation, earthing
connections, etc) which should be based on best trade practices.
3.3.3 Tools required

The list of the tools required to install the microwave links of the 9400 UX family is given below (applies to all
frequency bands).
Tool
Usage examples
2.5 mm Allen key (for M3 screw)
x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler
3 mm Allen key (for M4 screw)
x For adjusting the polarization of the antenna and the HSB coupler
x For mounting the antenna, the hot standby coupler
x For pointing the antenna
x For adjusting the polarization of the HSB coupler
Pipe wrench and 13 mm flat

wrench
16/17 mm box wrench and flat
wrench
For mounting the pole mounting for a separate antenna

x For fixing the pole mounting and fine tuning the antenna and various fastenings
16/17 mm torque wrench
For fixing the pole mounting and various fastening with the correct
torque
5 mm flat wrench
For dismantling/reassembling the cover on classic main, extension

and access IDUs
8 mm flat torque wrench, Radiall,

code: R282320
For fitting integrated attenuators in the ODU
20 mm flat torque wrench
x For fitting the N coaxial plugs
3.5 x 100 mm screwdriver

(for slotted head screws)
x Indoor installations: connectors, software key, handles, or for

changing the polarization of the antenna and for non integrated
assembly
10 x 100 mm screwdriver
For mounting the pole mounting in the case of a separate

antenna.
Manually or with a screwdriver

For mounting the solar shield of ODU A9400 flat ODU
The above tools marked with an x are included in a station toolkit, ref: 9400UXT103.
Depending on installation, additional equipment may be useful:
Mars Actel OSA3 Compax insertion and extraction tool, for wiring compax terminal blocks (mars actel
IDC) COMPAX; and Sub-D plug crimping tool, ref: 608868-1 (AMP).
Of course, normal installers tools are essential: drill, drill bits, soldering iron, cable tie pliers, terminal pliers, etc.
68/348
A set of consumables, ref: 9400UXT002 for one link is available as an option.

For commissioning, an optional service kit (commercial code 9400UXT102) can be used: this can be used to
measure the AGC voltage (relative to the received field) using a DC voltmeter, and includes a
headset/microphone assembly for connecting to the telephone service channel*.
* It is also possible to order just the service kit cable, under reference 9400UXT112.
A compass and a pair of binoculars (not supplied) are useful for roughly pointing the antenna.
3.3.4 Torques for the screws and connectors

The table below shows the maximum tightening torques requested.
Screw caliber
Maximum tightening torques

Ncm
Screw M3
61
Screw M4
150
Screw M6
490
Screw M8
1190
Screw M10
2380
Connector N (nut fastened onto the cable)
200
3.4
Installing 19 IDUs
IDUs can be installed:

front connector (Light IDU has only one connector panel),
with the operation panel to the front.
They can be installed:

on a desktop or on a wall mounting,
in a laborack or 9U subrack.
Main IDU
Access IDU
Caution: when several

IDUs are used, they must
be stacked in the order
shown opposite
Extension IDU
Main IDU
Extension IDU
Before installation, check the labels for IDU configuration information (bit rates and port impedances), type of
remote indication loops, EOW configuration.
CAUTION: do not place anything on the indoor units
69/348
3.4.1 Installation on feet or on a wall mounting

For desktop installation, fit each unit with its four feet (kit ref: 9400UXI303), the feet clip onto the bottom of
the unit.
To install units on a wall mounting, use kit ref.: 9400UXI301 which can support a maximum of three units.
For this wall mounting, the feet of the units must not be fitted. Kit 9400UXI301 includes: two brackets, four fixings
for the brackets (M6 x 50 socket cap screws, onduflex washers and 4620 expansion bolts), and fixings by the
front handles for three units (washers 19621 and screws EX 10804).
456
70
kit : 9400UXI301
3.4.2 Laborack or 9U subrack installation
3.4.2.1 Installing the 9U unit (Ref. 9400UXI302)
P = 360
H = 451,15
Useful cable
way 27x210
3.4.2.2 Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in 9U rack

The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )
1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.
1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.
This configuration supposes that room temperature should not exceed +45C (and that the temperature at the
IDU level never exceeds 55C) .
These recommendations allow good installation conditions (place for cable interconnections) and good
operation conditions (cooling of the IDU).
70/348
1U
1+1 Mux protected
9 U rack
1U
1+1 Mux protected

1U
1U
1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration
1U
1U
9 U rack
1U

1U
Figure 22 Example of installation in 9U Rack
3.4.2.3 Laborack installation
Laborack
dimensions :
.Height = 2050 mm
.Width = 540 mm
.Depth = 600 mm
Drilling template
Ref. : 9400XXI300
85
370
85
UX 1U UNIT
As standard, the laborack will be secured to the floor by four M6 socket cap
screws supplied with the equipment.
430
In the planned position, drill the floor

in accordance with the template:
drill holes: 12 mm
depth: 60 mm
Fit the plugs and position the laborack
Fix the laborack using the screws
Front
When you have correctly positioned the fixing brackets on the 19 unit, the equipment will be
held by the front panel by four screws fitted into the laboracks cage nuts.
71/348
3.4.2.4 Alcatel recommendations for IDU installation in rack

The recommendations depend on IDU configurations (1+ 0, 1+1 basic or 1+1 mux protected )
1+1 mux protected configuration : each group of 2 or 3 IDU shall be separated by 1U.
If a group of two IDU is used, aeration can be improved leaving 1U between the two IDU.
1+0 or 1+1 basic configuration : each IDU shall be separated by 1U.
This configuration supposes that room temperature at IDU level should not exceed +55C
Note: Be sure the cable path lets dismantling IDUs in 1+1
72/348
3.5
Outdoor part installation
3.5.1 General information

3.5.1.1 Pole mounting
The mechanical assembly is supplied complete, mechanically assembled, with screw fastenings kit and ground
terminals included in a plastic bag inside the casting.
The standard mechanical system is mounted on a pipe with a diameter of:
90 to 114 mm for 300 mm diameter antennas,
114 mm for 600 mm diameter integrated antennas.

CAUTION:
If the pipe diameter is smaller than the one mentioned above, the fixing brackets of
the pole mounting must be replaced by the kit 9400UXI103 that improves the wind
resistance of the whole equipment. This kit is especially recommended for the
600 mm antennas on 76 to 90 mm tubes.
There are also supports for fixing the pole to the wall: please consult us.
Various antenna types and sizes can be used, together with radio systems operating at different frequencies
and in a variety of configurations.
CAUTION:
Take care not to damage the ORing on the nose of the antenna connection.
If the ODU is not to be mounted immediately after the pole mounting of the antenna,
protect the connection nose (from water, dirt and impact).
For installation with nonintegrated antenna, please refer to the antenna manufacturer recommendations.
73/348
3.5.1.2 ODU
9400 UX Outdoor units are designed for assembly:
either with an integrated antenna connected directly to the Outdoor equipment, see 3.5.4.1 and
3.5.4.5,
or with one or more nonintegrated antennas, see 3.5.5., mounted with flextwist guides.
Service kit cable socket

(9400UXT102)
Pointing antenna
information
221 (257)
231 (231)
NOTE : figures between

brackets represent
the 13, 15 and 18 Ghz
frequency range
221 (257)
Coaxial to IDU
273 (273)
189 (189)
Ground socket
42
(42)
47
(47)
Figure 23 ODU 94XXUXR201 94XXUXR202 94XXUXR203
235
248
248,5
235
115,8
Coaxial to IDU
Ground socket
Service kit cable socket

(3DB00511AAAA)
Pointing antenna information
Figure 24 ODU A9400UX FLAT ODU

CAUTION:
Never remote the round yellow pads that are used to seal the system on the ODU.
Do not stand on the ODUs, as they are not designed to support the weight of a man.
74/348
3.5.2 Choosing antenna polarization

The antennas are normally supplied with vertical polarization.
TOP
TOP
Vertical polarization
Horizontal polarization
ANTENNA - NOSE END VIEW

vertical polarization
Socket cap screw

Nose
O-ring seal
TOP marker
Socket cap screw
Socket cap screw
Antenna nose slots
Drain orifice
To change the polarization: undo the three socket cap screws and turn the nose through 90 degrees then
tighten the screws again.
CAUTION: The seal should be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease is
provided with the antenna).
3.5.3 Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 0 (9400UXI102)

The antenna is screwed on the pole mounting 9400UXI102. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.
Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the maximum) is:
Azimuth: 360 degrees for a 300 mm and 600 mm diameter antenna, around the pipe.
The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:
Elevation: "25 degrees,
Azimuth: "10 degrees.
To avoid obstacles (wall too close, etc), you can fix the pole mounting on any side of the pipe. The dimensions
of the outdoor equipment are given in 3.2.1.
NOTE: The pole mounting 9400UXI102 is not designed to be fixed directly to the wall
Procedure :
1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of
obstacles.
75/348
2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their onduflex springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure the
screws (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting.
Top marker
Flat washer
Grower washer
Nut
Centering pin
or screw
M6 x 7 screws and
Ondulex washer x 7
Casting
Optional kit:
9400UXI103
OR
ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
A9400UX FLAT ODU
Figure 25 Pole mounting 1+0 configuration ( 9400UXI102)

CAUTION: For the torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.
76/348
3.5.3.1 Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203
Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.
Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two
grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the
bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,
begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish with
the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A
Position of catch for F > 20
GHz
for
ODU
from
94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203
Position of catch for F < 20 GHz for

ODU from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203
Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU from 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203, centre the
bottom ribs of the solar shield in the grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten
by hand the screw (M6) in the recess on the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to
extract the solar shield from its recess.
Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; do
not overtighten.
CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as an
indication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).
REMINDER:
The ODU/antenna assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the two ends are
smooth. Sealing is provided by the Oring seal around the male noses.
When the ODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertained from the position of the
ODU handle:
handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.
77/348
Two choices per polarization are possible:
OR
OR
Figure 26 Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201 to 94xxUXR203
78/348
3.5.3.2 Installing the flat ODU
Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two
grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the
bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support,
begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, and finish with
the top catch.
Catch bead
Position of catch for
A9400UX flat ODU
Flat ODU
Flange the ODU handle.
Reposition the solar shield via the back of the flat ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten by
hand the screw (M4) on the ODU.
CAUTION : When demounting, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screwdriver.
When the ODU is mounted, the 50 coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading of the
POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).
Here, the normal reading of the POL V indicates

the vertical polarization of the antenna
Figure 27 Installing the ODU A9400UX flat ODU
79/348
In vertical or horizontal polarization, the solar shield remains fixed in the same position and the
ODU is the only part which can rotate 90 degrees when changing the polarization. (See Figure 28).
Solar shield
The Arrow determines

the polarization.
Figure 28 Solar shield installation

3.5.3.3 Installing on the pipe.
CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.
Note: Be aware that azimutal coarse pointing of antenna is done at this phase.
3.5.3.4 Coarse pointing the antenna
Coarse pointing of the antenna is carried out as follows:
Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the pole mounting in the direction of the remote
station. Use the antenna top marker (see figures in 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, then
secure the brackets.
80/348
Azimutal coarse pointing has to be carried out when installing the pole mounting.
OR
A9400UX FLAT ODU
ODU 94XXUXR201,94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
Figure 29 Azimutal pointing of antenna
Elevation alignment is performed only with the elevation turnbuckles. If the elevation angle is
higher that (+ 5) or lower than ( 5), it is necessary to:
remove completely one of the 2 screws fixing the antenna support on the azimutal support and,
insert it in the third hole accessible.
81/348
si 5tat5
Put the screws in the

two external holes
= 25
= 25
si:
ou
or
>5
<5
Put the screws in the

2 holes visible through
the window, i.e. the
middle and the
external hole.
A9400UX FLAT ODU
Figure 30 Elevation coarse pointing of antenna

CAUTION:
In either case, the support must be fixed with 3 screws, 2 put in the window and 1
corresponding to its axis of rotation.
All screws must be tightened and secured only after fine pointing of the antenna
CAUTION:
Take care to put the 2 screws in the window with the flat washers positioned as
shown is the figure below.
82/348
3.5.4 Installing the configuration with pole mounting 1 + 1 (9400UXI101)

This assembly is valid only for antenna diameters of up to 600 mm (two feet). The antenna is screwed to the
pole mounting 9400UXI101. The ODU is mounted with quick latches.
Overall antenna steer (with turnbuckles set to the maximum) is:
azimutal: 360 degrees for a 300 mm diameter antenna and 180 degrees for a 600 mm diameter
antenna,
elevation: "25 degrees.
The steer obtained by the turnbuckles is:

azimutal: "9 degrees,
elevation: "9 degrees.
If you have physical difficulties assembling the mounting (wall too close, obstacle, etc), the azimutal turnbuckle
can be moved and mounted on the other side of the pole mounting arm.
Procedure :
1) Position the antenna vertically (nose horizontal), with the drain hole in the bottom part and free of
obstacles.
2) Insert the 7 M6 screws 1 with their onduflex springy crinkle washers 2 , tighten and secure the
screws (these screws can be found in a plastic bag located inside the casting).
83/348
Top marker
Centering pin
or screw
7 x M6 screw and
Onduflex washer
1 2
or
A9400UX FLAT ODU
ODU
94XXUXR201,
94XXUXR202,
94XXUXR203
Casting
Nut
Grower washer
flat washer
Optional kit
9400UXI103
Figure 31 9400UXI101 configuration

CAUTION: For the torque of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.
84/348
3.5.4.1 Installing the ODU 94XXUXR201, 94XXUXR202, 94XXUXR203

Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two protrusion bosses located inside the nose of the unit
and facing the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should
be located in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top
catch on the support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom
catch, to complete with the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A
GHz
for
ODU
from

Swivel the antenna support through 90 on its azimuthal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize
the vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).
Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shield in the
grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home, and moderately tighten by hand the screw (M6) in the recess
on the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess.
Note: The locking screw is not a fixing, it is simply intended to safeguard against inadvertent dismantling; do
not overtighten.
CAUTION: If the screw cannot be reached by hand, use a 16 mm flat wrench (as an
indication, fasten to a torque of 1mN, that is 0.1mdaN).
REMINDER:
For a 1+0 configuration, when the ODU is fitted, the polarization of the antenna can be ascertained
from the position of the ODU handle:
handle arranged vertically = horizontal polarization, and vice versa.
3.5.4.2 Installing the ODU 9400UX flat ODU

Remove the solar shield by undoing the M4 fixing screw manually or with a screw driver.
Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the nose of the unit and facing
the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located
in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the
support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, to
complete with the top catch.
Catch bead
A9400UX flat ODU
Flat ODU
Swivel the antenna support through 90 on its azimutal axis to release it from the pole. Immobilize the
vertical axis by the five screws (see Figure 32, item 3 ).
85/348
CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screwdriver.
When the ODU is mounted, the 50ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading
of the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).
3.5.4.3 Installing on the pipe.

CAUTION: Do not pick up the ODU/antenna assembly by the ODU handle.
3.5.4.4 Pointing the antenna
1) Roughly adjust the elevation orientation of the pole mounting in the direction of the remote
station. The elevation turnbuckle should remain in its middle position. Use the antenna top marker (see
figures in 3.5.2), a compass and binoculars, then secure the brackets 2 in optional Kit 9400UXI103.
CAUTION: The bracket nuts should be fastened to a torque of 3 m.daN +/ 20%.
The brackets must be clean and without grease except on the threads.
2) Roughly point the antenna support towards the required azimuthal by undoing the azimuthal
locking screw. The azimuthal turnbuckle should remain in its middle position (approximately 85 mm
centres); swivel the antenna support vertically for adjustment purposes, then retighten the azimuthal
locking screw.
CAUTION: The azimuthal turnbuckle should not exceed 94 mm centre distance when
fine tuning the adjustment.
CAUTION:
Never mount integrated antennas and ODUs under the pole mounting support.
Never mount the elevation axis horizontally:
ODUs must be above the pole mounting and not laterally offset.
86/348
3) On the pole mounting, undo the 4 + 1 M8 screws (item 3 - see figure below) so that you will be
able to fit the ODU later.
Pole mounting
Position of pack of screw

fasteners and terminals
3
Azimuthal locking
screw
Kit 9400UXI103
(optional)
2
Figure 32 Pointing the antenna
4) Position the U bolts 2 on the pole, fit the flat washers, grower washers and nuts.
CAUTION: For the fasten torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.
87/348
3.5.4.5 Installing the (1+1) HSB configuration with integrated antenna

TYPICAL 1 + 1 HSB CONFIGURATION WITH COUPLER
ODU 94xxUXR201 to ODU 94xxUXR203
750 ( 13 38 GHz )
Coupler box
Antenna
Solar shield
Main ODU
Coupler
Standby ODU
Support (Pole mounting)
ODU 9400UX flat ODU
Solar shield
Main ODU
Antenna
Coupler
Standby ODU
Support (Pole mounting)
88/348
INSTALLING THE HSB COUPLER

IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USED
TO SEAL THE OUTDOOR SYSTEM.
The coupler is supplied with vertical polarization (see 3.5.2). The procedure for changing the polarization of
the HSB coupler is described in that section (see 7.13). This must be done before installation.
To install the HSB coupler assembly:
take it by the handle, offer up the two bosses located in the nose of the coupler on the side of the
antenna port, to the grooves in the nose of the antenna,
Do not remove the sealing window located on the antenna port. The ODU/coupler/antenna
assembly requires no additional seal on the flanges; the flanges are smooth and sealing is provided
by the Oring seal located around the male noses.
fix the coupler using three M6 x 35 mm screws and nuts in the holes in the top lugs of the pole
mounting.
secure the coupler by the two side screws (M6 x 30) on the pole mounting.
Fixing holes on radio support ring of pole
mounting
O-ring seal
CAUTION: The seal should be
coated with silicon grease before
assembly
Standby ODU
Antenna
port
Side fixing holes on

pole mounting arm
CAUTION: The seal should be coated with silicon grease before assembly (the grease
is provided with the HSB).
INSTALLING ODU
The positions of the main and standby ODUs are shown in the previous figures; for installing the ODUs, see
3.5.4.1.
3.5.5 Installation with non-integrated antenna

3.5.5.1 Method
Install the antenna on the pipe, according to the instructions given by the manufacturer and supplied
with the antenna, and prepoint the antenna towards the remote station using a compass and a pair of
binoculars,
Install the pole mounting on the pipe, see 3.5.4.3,
Install the HSB coupler on the pole mounting (only for 1+1 configuration), see 3.5.4.5,
Install the ODU, see 3.5.4.1,
Install the flextwist (suited to the frequency) between the pole mounting and the antenna, see 3.5.5.6.
89/348
3.5.5.2 Typical installation

a) with ODU 94xxUXR201 or 94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203
Smooth square flange
Flextwist
Square flange
with groove
ODU 94xxUXR201 or
94xxUXR202 or 94xxUXR203
Antenna 0.90 m or greater
Adpater nose
Support radio
94XXUXI102
b) with ODU 94xxUXR204
Flextwist
ODU 9400UX flat ODU
with solar shield
Antenna 0.90 m or greater
Support radio
94XXUXI102
90/348
3.5.5.3 Assembling and installing radio support

For installation, you will need the following:
The ODU support, ref: 1AB128510002 is regardless of frequency band.
a microwave nose,
a 600 mm long flextwist waveguide.

Note : As our ODU supports are chromate plated or tinned on the flextwist, be careful with
the materials used facing the unit to prevent any galvanic couple.
Frequency
range
Antenna side flange
Flextwist flanges
Radio side
flange
Flextwist
reference
13 GHz
PBR 120
UBR 120/PBR 120
UBR 120
9413UXI103
15 GHz
PBR 140
UBR 140/PBR 140
UBR 140
9415UXI103
PBR 220
UBR 220/PBR 220
UBR 220
94XXUXI103
18 GHz
23/25 GHz
38 GHz
Only integrated antennas
The pole mounting kit comprises the parts detailed below.

Vertical
polarization
Horizontal
polarization
Choose the horizontal or vertical polarization to match that of the ODU before fixing nose C (type
dependent on the frequency) on plate A with the three M4 x 16 socket cap screws (3 mm Allen key).
Choose the direction of assembly of plate B (on the right or on the left of the pipe); this should match
that of the antenna, then bolt the plate A onto plate B with four M10 x 35 hex nuts and four washers.
Offer up the assembly to the antenna support pipe, then secure it with the M10 U bolts, nuts, lock nuts
and washers.
Check that all the screw fastenings are correctly tightened.

CAUTION: The seal should be coated with silicone grease before fitting (the grease is
provided with the microwave nose).
91/348
3.5.5.4 Installing the ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203
1) Remove the solar shield by undoing the M6 fixing screw with a 16 mm flat wrench.
2) Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses inside the nose of the unit to the two grooves
in the adapter nose (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located in the bottom part of the
ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the support, begin by fastening
the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch and finish with the top catch.
Catch bead
Support plate A
GHz
for
ODU
from

3) Reposition the solar shield via the back of the ODU, centre the bottom ribs of the solar shield
in the grooves of the ODU. Slide fully home and, by hand, tighten the screw (M6) in the recess on
the underside of the ODU. Check the assembly by trying to extract the solar shield from its recess
*(torque, by way of indication: 1 mN = 0.1 mdaN)

3.5.5.5 Installing the flat ODU
Take the ODU by the handle, offer up the two bosses located inside the nose of the unit and facing
the two grooves in the nose of the antenna (the ODU-IDU connecting cable entry should be located
in the bottom part of the ODU). Still holding the ODU, engage without fastening the top catch on the
support, begin by fastening the two side catches on the support, then fasten the bottom catch, to
complete with the top catch.
Catch bead
A9400UX flat ODU
Flat ODU
CAUTION : When unscrewing, if the screws cannot be reached by hand, use a screwdriver.
92/348
When the ODU is mounted, the 50ohm coaxial jack is always facing down, the natural reading
of the POL H or POL V etching shows the antenna polarization (see Figure 27).
3.5.5.6 Installing the Flextwist waveguide

Refer to the example given in 3.5.5.2 and the table in 3.5.5.3.
This 600 mm long twistable flexible waveguide is supplied complete with gaskets and fasteners. At one end,
it has a smooth square flange (to be mounted on the antenna) and at the other end, a grooved square flange
designed to accommodate an O-ring seal (mounted at the ODU end). The kit comprises:
one 600 mm flextwist waveguide,
one O-ring seal for square flange,
six M4 x 20 or M3 x 16 stainless steel socket cap screws (11/13/15 GHz or 18/23/25 GHz versions
respectively),
six M4 x 12 (11/13/15 GHz) or M3 x 12 (18/23/25 GHz) stainless steel socket cap screws,
12 18/10 stainless Z4 (11/13/15 GHz) or Z3 (18/23/25 GHz) flat washers,
12 18/10 stainless B4 (11/13/15 GHz) or B3 (18/23/25 GHz) Onduflex springy crinkle washers ,
six 18/10 stainless HM4 (11/13/15 GHz) or HM3 (18/23/25 GHz) hex nuts,
one record of measurements taken on the waveguide.

REMEMBER TO FIT THE GASKETS AND TIGHTEN THE SCREWS.
93/348
3.6
Wiring
3.6.1 Wiring the power supply to the 19 indoor units

3.6.1.1 Direct connection with the power supply
The 48 V DC or 24 V DC connection kit is for setting up the power connection between the main or extension
IDU and the distribution panel (one for each terminal). On the user side, the plus or minus pole can be
grounded in the current version of the equipment.
Plug + shell reference: 3CC08048AAxx or ABxx
(supplied with the connector kit)
Shell
For 48 V supply, 3 x 1.5 mm2 connecting cable

(minimum), flexible, unshielded
For 24 V supply, 3 x 2.5 mm2 connecting cable
(minimum) flexible, unshielded
-V female contact
Ground
+V female contact
Preparing the connecting cable
3.6.1.2 Power panel and IDU

19, 3U internal power panel (ref: 9400XXC511)
This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, providing remote connection to the operators power input.
Wall mounted power unit (ref: 9400XXC512)
This provides six ways protected by 6A fuses, for

remote connection to the operators power input.
94/348
For both these products, the fuses used are 8.5 x 31.5 6A 400V gG domestic type cartridges.
The cables supplied to connect the IDUs are:
48 V: 3CC08165AAxx(3 x 1.5 mm2),
24 V:
3CC08209AAxx (3 x 2.5 mm2).
To connect the operators input, the recommended cable is:

48 V : 3CC08211AAxx (3 x 4 mm2),
24 V : 3CC08212AAxx (3 x 10 mm2).
3.6.2 Equipment grounding

Grounding connections are made on three separate parts:
the indoor units,
the outdoor units,
the pole mounting mechanical assembly.
Earthing is bonded using green/yellow insulated cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1x16 mm2
towards the grounding vertical run. Wiring should be kept as short as possible. The overall length for all of the
connections must not exceed 20 metres.
In addition, the IDU/ODU cable may be grounded using kit: 9400UXI204
The ground connection for the ODU part should not be done through the lightning
conductor.
3.6.2.1 On 19 indoor units (IDU)
The ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal (connector side of the unit, alongside the IDU/ODU coaxial
socket), to which is fastened (by its M6 screw) a crimp terminal.
Tapped ground terminal
3.6.2.2 On outdoor units (ODU)

The mechanical ground terminal comprises a tapped terminal located on the front of the ODU (see 3.5).
GroundingEarthing connections are by crimp terminal (this is supplied with the pole mountings kit of screw
fasteners).
95/348
3.6.2.3 On the pole mounting assembly

The ground terminal comprises a tapped hole located at the back of the cast part which supports the radio unit
in the 1+0 configuration and the HSB coupler in a 1+1 configuration. The ground terminal is based on a crimp
terminal (this terminal is supplied with the pole mountings kit of screw fasteners).
tapped hole
for ground
terminal
grounding
kit 9400UXI204
The installation
of the grounding
kit is necessary
only if D > 80m
tapped hole for

ground terminal
Indoor
Figure 33 Grounding the pole mounting and the cable
96/348
Lightning finial
bonded to tower
I.F. cable outer conductor bonded to

tower at top and bottom of vertical
run via feeder grounding kit
Zone of protection provided by tower
I.F. cable
Boundary fence ground
via building ground ring
I.F. cable outer conductor

bonded to ground via feeder
grounding kit
Ground bar below the hopper

Each tower leg bonded
via sacrificial ground lug
to tower ground ring
Independent grounding functions, e.g.

DC power, AC power, etc.
Tower and building ground rings interconnected (driven electrode systems shown)
Figure 34 Typical example of good grounding practice [ETSI document Draft EG 200 053 V1.4.3
(200202) (Page 91/145), informative]
3.6.3 IDU/ODU wiring

The link is provided by a single 50 ohm coaxial cable (for each IDU/ODU link). For protection against
interference and to ensure that it does not radiate interference (EMC requirements), the cable used is
double-shielded, 11 mm in diameter, with an outer PU sheathing (for UV protection) with a maximum length of
300 meters approved today under the reference 1AC001100022.
The outer sheathing of the cable is marked at approximately 60 cm intervals with the cable reference
1AC001100022. The cable is terminated by male, elbow N type connectors, ref: 9400UXI203. The connectors
are watertight, but, for added protection, when connected, preferably wind selfamalgamating tape supplied
with the consumables kit (optional) around the connector.
Instructions for fitting these connectors are given in Appendix 5.
The greatest possible attention should be paid to the wiring of the coaxial plugs and to compliance with the cable
installation rules, such as: minimum bending radius of 80 mm, watertightness, etc. If ordered by the customer,
a cable grounding kit may be supplied; this is for sites where radio frequency interference is high, for example:
radio stations, TV transmitters, etc. Kit ref: 9400UXI204 (see figure 33).
Instructions for the use of the cable earthing kit are supplied with the kit.
In a 1 + 1 configuration, the difference in length between IDU / ODU cables must not exceed 20 metres.
97/348
3.6.3.1 Fixing the IDU/ODU cable

The coaxial cable is fixed to the pole mounting as rigidly as possible to avoid repetitive movement caused by
mechanical or atmospheric vibrations that might in turn damage the cable or connector.
CABLE FIXING
9400UX flat ODU
Cable ties and

cable tie slots
IDU/ODU cable
correct positioning
OR
Opening for the Service kit catch
ODU
ODU / IDU CABLE

Cable ties
ODU / IDU cable

ODU 9400UX flat ODU
The cable is fixed along the supporting pipe or pole by the normal methods (Colson cable ties are supplied in
the optional consumables kit)
98/348
3.6.4 Wiring the 34 Mbit/s tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream

The 34 Mbit/s port is implemented by 1.6/5.6 connectors located on a plate installed at:
I/O (9/16) on the main IDU for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations,
I/O (9/16) on the access IDU for 1+1 configurations with MUX protection.
If a BNC connector is required for the 34 Mbit/s stream, use a BNC/1.6/5.6 adapter kit, ref: 9400XXI405.
1.6/ 5.6 connector
1.6/ 5.6 connector
34Mbit/s port
+ 2Mbit/s auxilliary
The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-pin Sub-D connectors:
I/O (1/8) on the main IDU,
I/O (1/8) on the access IDU.

PIN
SIGNAL
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s
In+
In
Out+
Out
28
19
37
LAU : 3CC06061AAxx
LIU : 3CC06118AAxx
X
In the 75 version, In+ and Out+ are the live input and output points and In- and Out- are the ground
connectors for the signals.
3.6.5 Wiring n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries

3.6.5.1 Connections
The user ports will be via one of the following ports described in Appendix 6.1.1:
37-way I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on the main IDU,
37way I/O (1 4) connectors on the Light IDU version,
37-way I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) connectors on the access IDU (1+1 version with MUX protection),
when the access IDU exists.
on 3CC13659AAxx cables (1+1 with MUX protection without access IDU)
In 120 ohms, if the non-distributor option is selected, wire the braces supplied with the IDU-ODU connector
kit (ref: 3CC07899AAxx) using a crimping tool (608868-1, from AMP).
3.6.5.2 Wall mounting (9400UXI301) indoor units
3U 19 mounting
The distributors described below can be fixed to a wall using this kit
comprising two brackets + fixing screws.
398 mm
60 mm
99/348
3.6.5.3 4 x 2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor

COMMERCIAL CODE
OF DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
9400XXI404
OUTPUT
TYPE
75
1.6/5.6
CABLE
1 Unit
37-pin
connector
2m
3CC08061AAxx
3CC07885Axxx
1x
9400XXI404
9400XX405
75
BNC
DISTRIBUTOR
37-pin
connector
1 Unit = 44.45 mm
1U
2m
3CC08061ABxx
3CC07759Axxx
For 120 wiring, use the cables provided for the 8 x 2 Mbit/s version.
COMMERCIAL CODE
OF DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
9400XXI408
OUTPUT
TYPE
75
1.6/5.6
CABLE
37-pin
connector
1U
2m
3CC07885Axxx
2x
9400XXI408
9400XXI405
75
BNC
DISTRIBUTOR
37-pin
connector
3CC08061AAxx
1U
2m
3CC08061ABxx
3CC07759Axxx
3U EMC
120
2m
3CC07658Axxx
3CC07810AAxx
9400XXI408
1U
120
2m
3CC07658Axxx
100/348
3CC08062AAxx non EMC

COMMERCIAL CODE
OF DISTRIBUTOR
ASSEMBLY
9400XXI416
OUTPUT
TYPE
75
1.6/5.6
CABLE
37-pin
connector
1U
2m
2 x 3CC07885Axxx
9400XXI416
4 x 9400XXI405
75
BNC
DISTRIBUTOR
37-pin
connector
3CC08061AAxx
1U
2m
2 x 3CC07759Axxx
3CC08061ABxx
3U EMC
120
2m
2 x 3CC07658Axxx
3CC07810AAxx
9400XXI416
1U
120
2m
2 x 3CC07658Axxx
3CC08062AAxx non EMC
3.6.6 Engineering service channel wiring

This wiring is for connecting the users terminal equipment to the ESC connector. For the link cable, use the
connectors supplied in the connector kit shipped with the IDU-ODU assembly. The pinout of the connectors
is given in Appendix 6.2.
101/348
3.6.7 Alarm and remote control wiring (TS/TC)

The TS/TC interface on:
the ALARMS I/O connector of the main IDU,
the ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector of the Light IDU versions.
is used to:
supply three signals (outputs) to the equipment (dry loops, 0.5 A/100 V).
supply (output) one remote control (dry loop, 0.5 A/100 V).
connect eight housekeeping alarm inputs: n1 to n8 alarms. These alarms are formed by normally
opened or normally closed loops, see 7.10.
For the connecting cable, use the connector provided in the connector kits supplied with the IDUODU
assembly. The connector pinout is given in the Appendix 6.3.
3.6.8 Engineering service channel ESC2 telephone handset

The service channel telephone handset (classic IDU only, ref: 9400XXB000, optional kit) is as shown below.
It connects to the IDU, via the RJ11 connector with the handset symbol; it uses DTMF (tone) dialling.
To safeguard against EMC problems, remember to clip the isolating ferrite core on the
cable. This is supplied in the main IDU connector kit (3CC08048ABxx.
The handset can be connected to the main IDU, via the front panel or connector panel.
Caution: to operate, set the handset switch to FV.
Set switch to
FV
Isolating ferrite core

RJ 11 connector
102/348
3.7
Wiring between a terminals units
3.7.1 Main IDU - extension IDU wiring

This is for 1+1 configurations of all types and 1+0 configurations with extension.
( 9 / I6 )
Cable
3CC07160ABxx
Cable
3CC07157ABxx
Main IDU
Extension IDU
Connect the ESC EXT connector on the main IDU to the ESC MAIN connector on the extension IDU using a
cable ref: 9400UXC130 (3CC07157ABxx), with male 37-way connectors (L = 300 mm).
Connect the EXT connector on the main IDU to the MAIN connector on the extension IDU via a cable
ref: 9400UXB221 (3CC07160ABxx), with 68-way rectangular plugs (L = 300 mm).
103/348
3.7.2 Wiring the access IDU to a main and extension IDU

This applies to 1+1 configurations with multiplex protection.
NOTE:
When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must be
arranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, access unit (when used),
extention unit.
3.7.2.1 N x 2 Mbit/s without Access IDU (no more needed with IDU type 2)
3/16
2 Mbits bit
stream
connection
1/8
MAIN IDU
Cable
3CC07160ABxx
Cables
3CC13659AAxx
Cable
3CC07157ABxx
Extension IDU
Configuration with MUX protection without access IDU
Two identical cables ref: 3CC013659AAxx, 37pin male plugs,

L = 300 mm are used to connected to the following connectors between the two IDUs:
ACCESS (1/8) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.
ACCESS (9/16) connector of the extension IDU to the I/O (9/16) connector of the main IDU.
NOTE:
When the 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection is selected, the units must be
arranged physically from top to bottom, as follows: main unit, extention unit.
3.7.2.2 34 Mbit/s with Access IDU (for both IDU type 1 and IDU type 2)
Cables
3CC07157ABxx
Main IDU
Cable
3CC07160ABxx
Cable
3CC07157ABxx
Access IDU
2 Mbit/s
Extension IDU
34 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s bit stream connection

Aux 2 Mbit/s bit stream connection
Two identical cables ref: 3CC07157ABxx, 37pin male plugs,

L = 300 mm are used to connected to the following connectors of the access IDU:
MAIN (1/8) to the I/O (1/8) connector of the main IDU.
EXT (1/8) to the ACCESS I/O (1/8) connector of the extension IDU.
104/348
3.8
Wiring between terminals of a station
The wiring in this case is to provide continuity of tributaries and service channels between the various terminals
of the particular station.
3.8.1 Tributary wiring

Set up the wiring to interconnect the various tributaries from the N x 2 Mbit/s distributors or the 34 Mbit/s
connectors of each terminal according to the wiring diagram specified by the network administrator.
3.8.2 ESC wiring

3.8.2.1 ESC1 (supervision channel)
STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS
Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS
Connect the NMS1 connector on the first unit to the NMS1 connector on the second unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx) 2 m long.
Connect the NMS2 connector on the second unit to the NMS1 connector on the third unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
NODE EXCHANGE
The supervision bus is used to extend the wiring to N items of equipment by linking the NMS2 connector of one
to the NMS1 connector of the next, as many times as is needed, using cable ref: 9400UXC332
(3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
SNMP bus protection: the SNMP bus supports meshed connections, for example, by linking the NMS2
connector of the nth terminal to the NMS1 connector of the first terminal, and so on.
3.8.2.2 ESC2 wiring (analogue channel)
This channel is not provided in the Light IDU versions.
STATION WITH TWO 2-WAY TERMINALS
Connect the BACK TO BACK connectors of the main IDUs via cable ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2m
long
STATION WITH THREE 3-WAY TERMINALS
Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the first unit and second unit via cable ref: 9400UXC333
(3CC06688AAxx), 2 m long,
and connect the AUDIO1 ports of the second unit to the AUDIO1 ports of the third unit using cable ref:
9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long.
105/348
The connections can be extended to n terminals according to the figure below:

Connect the BACK TO BACK ports of the terminals (1 and 2), (3 and 4), (5 and 6), etc, via cable
ref: 9400UXC333 (3CC08729AAxx), 2 m long,
and connect the AUDIO1 ports of terminals (2 and 3), (4 and 5), (6 and 7), etc, via cable
ref: 9400UXC332 (3CC07711AAxx), 2 m long .
E1
Audio1 to Audio 1
Back to back
E2
Back to back
E3
E4
Audio1 to Audio 1
E5
Back to back
E6
3.8.2.3 ESC 3, 4, 5 wiring

CLASSIC IDUS
Set up specific wiring using the connectors supplied with the IDU connector kit
Connector pinout information is given in Appendix 5
9way connector
3CC07920AAxx
25way connector
3CC08221AAxx
37way connector
3CC07899AAxx
LIGHT IDU
Only service channel 3 is available.
Prepare specific wiring with 37way connector 3CC09311AAxx supplied with the connector kit.
106/348
4 Configuration and operation software

Systems are commissioned, operated and maintained via a portable PC with the 946LUX50 1320 CT
supervision software installed which runs in Windows(TM) environment. The computer connects directly to the
main IDU (F connector, item in the figure below), via an F connector adapter cable (3CC14134AAxx)and
connected to a 9-way/9-way cable (1AB 054120027) supplied with the set of software installation diskettes or
CDROM.

CLASSIC IDU
RST
IDU
LIGHT IDU

Figure 35 Controls, indicators and connectors on the IDU
This manual applies to the946LUX50 version of the software installed on the PC.
For the terminal to which it is connected and for the remote terminal (when the link is set up), this software can
be used to:
display and administer all alarms, status, remote controls,
read and modify the configuration (bit rate, frequencies, etc),
display transmission parameters (received power, transmission power),
monitor performance (G.784),
download software,
browse remote inventory,
Display event log.
107/348
4.1
Installing the software
4.1.1 Warning note

You are assumed to be familiar with:
use of the installed PC and its devices,
operation of the PC in WINDOWS NT, 2000 or XP *.
In addition, for some of the configuration applications, the operator should be aware of certain specifications
of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy (PDH) (ITUT Recommandations).
The PC must have the following minimum specifications:
Pentium III or compatible processor operating at 850 MHz or above,
256 Mbytes of RAM (512 Mbytes recommended with Windows XP),
serial asynchronous communication port,
4 Gbytes hard disk,
CDROM or DVDROM drive,
1024 x 768 display.
The operating systems validated are the following:

Windows NT 4.0 SP3 to SP6, 2000 to SP4, or XP to SP1 installed on the hard disk.
Before installing the system, check the following points:
if there is a virtual disk, uninstall it,
check that the system date and time are correct and if not, adjust them.
* MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of MICROSOFT Corporation
108/348
4.2
Summary of SW installation steps
The installation steps for the software in PC WINDOWSNT/XP/2000 environments (PC disconnected from
Equipment Controller) are as follows:
Installation from software CDROM
installation of 1320CT + NE software from software CDROM
end of SW installation from software CDROM
CT initial configuration
NE login
Craft Terminal configuration
NE software downloading preparation that is described in detail in following paragraphs.
4.2.1 Software loading in PC WINDOWSNT/XP/2000 environment
CAUTION:
Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE
4.2.2 Installation of CT + NE software from CDROM

4.2.2.1 Standard software installation
The software installation can be performed with two different procedures:
CT Products automatic installation
CT Products guided installation
The first procedure is used to upgrade the new software in the system, the second one must be used to perform
the first software installation and to upgrade two specific components: Java and LLMan.
The standard installation sequence uses the guided procedure to install the first two components (Java and
LLMan), and then the automatic one to install the other components.
The components that need to be installed are the following:
JRE: Java Runtime Environment
LLMan: Alcatel Lower Layer Manager (required for craft terminaltoIDU connection through its
interface)
CTK: Craft Terminal kernel component
SNMPCTKADDON: Craft terminal additional component for management of SNMP NES
HOLDCTKADDON: Craft terminal online help component
JUSMLUX50: LUX50 Java User Service Manager, NE management interface
SW Package REG 946LUX50: LUX50 IDU embedded software (for IDU software download)
The following describes (step by step) the procedure to install JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager with
the CT Products guided installation
109/348
Operations sequence:
Step 1. Select CT Products guided installation and press NEXT button.
Step 2. Select JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager components.
Figure 36 Craft Terminal Component Selection Guided Installation

Step 3. Press Next button to begin the installation of the previously selected components.
Step 4. Start the Java installation and answer the questions according to your system.
Step 5. If a computer restart is requested, select NO and continue the installation.
NOTE: The computer restart must be performed at the END of the installation procedure.
110/348
Figure 37 Lower Layer Manager Welcome screen

Step 6. Press NEXT button to start the installation of the Lower Layers Manager.
111/348
Figure 38 Lower Level Manager Completion Screen

Step 7. Select Configure Lower Layer and press Finish to complete the operation.
112/348
Step 8. Complete the configuration by pressing OK button.

NOTE.: If a network adapter is not running on your PC, you can set the System identifierfield with a sequence
of 120. The following window will be displayed.
Figure 39 Lower Layer Manager Settings Screen
Figure 40 Null System Identifier Warning

Step 9. Click Yes to confirm.
113/348
The following describes the procedure for installing all the components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager with the CT Products automatic installation
Operations sequence:
Step 1. Select the CT Products automatic installation and press Next button.
Figure 41 CT Products Automatic Installation Screen
114/348
Step 2. Select all components except JRE and Alcatel Lower Layer Manager.
Figure 42 Craft Terminal Component Selection (automatic selection)

Step 3. Press Next to execute the installation of the selected components.
4.2.2.2 Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
After installing the software on the CT you must configure a virtual network interface for the NE connection using
TCP/IP through the serial port.
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is a software component used by Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to manage TCP/IP packets through the serial port.
Follow this guide to install and configure Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers using the Control
Panel.
4.2.2.3 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers under Windows NT 4.0
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers select the Adapters tab in the Network Control Panel
applet.
Before installing Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please refer
to Windows NT Help).
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from the
Control Panel.
115/348
Click the Add... button in the Adapter tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
In the Select Network Adapter window, click on the Have Disk... button in order to add the Alcatel
Lower Layer network adapter.
Figure 43 Network Adapter Selection (Windows NT 4.0)

In the Insert Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.
C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Prompt window to
discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
116/348
Figure 44 Alcatel Lower Layer Driver Selection (Windows NT 4.0)
If the following dialog box appears, the driver is already installed.
Figure 45 Existing Net Card Warning (Windows NT 4.0)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You will need to configure its TCP/IP parameters
before using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.
117/348
4.2.2.4 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows NT 4.0
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers use both the Bindings and the Protocols tabs
in the Network Control Panel applet.
Before configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP protocol (please
refer to Windows NT Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network Control Panel applet from the
Control Panel.
Select the bindings of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers in the Bindings tab (1), (2) of the
Network Control Panel applet.
Disable any unnecessary components (3), (4).
Select the Protocols tab (5) of the Network Control Panel applet, then either a message box (NT
configuration step 2) or a dialog box (NT configuration step 3) may appear.
Follow the instructions until the dialog box (NT configuration step 4) appears.
2
3
4
Figure 46 Alcatel VNC Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)
118/348
Click Yes to save changes.
Figure 47 Change Configuration Dialog (Windows NT 4.0)
Select Protocols tab (1), TCP/IP Protocol (2) and click the Properties button (3).
Figure 48 TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows NT 4.0)
119/348
Configure the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers
and click OK.
3
4
5
Figure 49 TCP/IP Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)
120/348
Click Close in the Protocols tab of the Network Control Panel applet.
Figure 50 TCP/IP End of Configuration (Windows NT 4.0)
The new configuration of Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers will be used at the next restart
of the computer.
If you are configuring or installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you can click Yes.
If you are installing some other component you should click No, continue the installation and restart
the computer later.
Figure 51 Computer Restart Confirmation (Windows NT 4.0)
121/348
4.2.2.5 Installing the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000/XP
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers, run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the
Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install the TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000/XP Help).
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dialup connections
applet from the Control Panel.
Click the Next button in the Welcome to the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard dialog box.
Figure 52 Add/Troubleshoot Selection (Windows 2000/XP)
122/348
Figure 53 Adding Network Adapter (Windows 2000/XP)
123/348
Click the Have Disk... button in the Select Network Adapter dialog box.
Figure 54 Selecting Network Adapter (Windows 2000/XP)

In the Install From Disk dialog box, type the source path of the driver files copied during installation phase (e.g.
C:\WinNT\System32\Drivers\LLmanNIC; type echo %systemroot% from a Command Prompt window to
discover the right location of the WinNT folder) and click OK.
124/348
Figure 55 Alcatel Lower Layers Selection (Windows 2000/XP)
125/348
Click Next in the Start Hardware Installation dialog box.
Figure 56 Finish Lower Layers Installation (Windows 2000/XP)

Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now installed. You need to configure its TCP/IP parameters
before using it with Alcatel Lower Layers Manager.
126/348
4.2.2.6 Configuring the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers Under Windows 2000/XP
To configure the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Network and Dialup connections
applet from the Control Panel.
Before installing and configuring Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers you need to install TCP/IP
protocol (please refer to Windows 2000/XP Help).
To install the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers run the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard from the
Control Panel.
Open the network connection using the Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers from the Network
and Dialup connections applet.
Figure 57 Open Lower Layer Connection (Windows 2000/XP)
Uncheck any unnecessary component in the Properties dialog box General tab (1). Check and select
the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) component (2) and click Properties (3).
127/348
1
2
3
Figure 58 TCP/IP Protocol Selection (Windows 2000/XP)
128/348
Configure the IP Address (1) and the Subnet Mask (2) and click OK (3).
1
2
3
Figure 59 TCP/IP Configuration (Windows 2000/XP)
Alcatel Virtual Network Card for Lower Layers is now configured. You will need the Alcatel Lower Layers
Manager to use it.
4.2.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM

Having reached this phase, you have finished the Software transfer from SWP CDROM to the PC environment.
Now, you can remove the SWP CDROM from the PCs CDROM drive.
129/348
4.3
CT initial configuration
4.3.1 Preliminary Procedures

CAUTION:
Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC disconnected from the NE
4.3.2 Craft Terminal configuration

This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes the
following types of configuration:
PC hostname
CT configuration
Communication Protocol (TCP/IP):
TCP/IP without a network card
TCP/IP with a network card
Switching between the two configurations
Serial Communication with the NE
Screen settings
Refer to 1320 CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, section Installation, chapter Craft Terminal
Configuration (document reference 3AL79551AAAA).
4.3.3 NE Login
In order to carry out procedures described in following paragraphs Craft Terminal configuration, NE Profile
management and NE software downloading preparation, the NE must be loggedin, as described below:
Craft Terminal (CT) startup:
power on CT and wait for PC startup
Start 1320CTP v.x.x.x ; notes:
if choice 1320CTP v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: Software
Package loading is necessary
x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded

After a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network Elements
that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ? (it means they are
not supervised)
Figure 60 Craft Terminal Global View Screen
130/348
Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE):

From screen Network Element Synthesis (see CT start above):
select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it;
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision and with left mouse button execute
it (click once).
Wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state)
Figure 61 Start NE Supervision
Network Element login

From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see Start supervision on a selected
Network Element (NE), second step, above):
select the interested Network Element (NE) clicking once right mouse button on it;
select Show Equipment.
Figure 62 NE login
131/348
4.3.4 NE software downloading preparation

This description is taken from the 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook, section EML construction, chapter
Administrating files, paragraph Software Administration and is repeated here for ease of operation.
This phase must be manually carried out by the Operator to make the new equipment software package
available for its downloading toward the equipment controller and the peripheral units.
This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the following
procedure:
From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administration and then the Software
Administration option:
Figure 63 Software Administration Selection

In the figure that opens (see next as an example) select the directory where the NE software package
is installed: Alcatel / JUSMxxx / ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.
The NE software package can also be selected from the CDROM used for the installation of the NE
software. In this case, after inserting the CDROM in the driver, choose the following: ect / swdw /
<equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.
Figure 64 NE Software Selection

Click on Open to activate the installation file selected. At the end of the process, a confirmation
message is displayed.
At this point the NE Software Package is installed in another directory and available to be downloaded
on the Network Element.
132/348
4.4
Software download toward NE
This chapter details all phases necessary to install the SW in the equipment environment for the first time.
CAUTION:
Procedures described in the following are carried out with the PC connected to the NE
This is a general procedure valid for all NE types.
4.4.1 Requirements
4.4.1.1 NE hardware
The equipment must have been already physically installed, cabled and powered on, according to the
instructions given in the:
4.4.1.2 Craft Terminal
The Craft Terminal, already loaded with the SW to be downloaded toward the NE, must be available together
with the 9 pin/9 pin cable and F connector adapter cable for its connection to the equipment F interface.
4.4.1.3 Operator skills and profile
In addition to skills stated in para.4.1.1, the Operator must be familiar with all the equipment functionalities.
4.4.2 Summary of the SW installation phases

The installation phases are:
SW download to the NE (PC is connected to Equipment Controller), para.4.4.3 below
NE configuration, para. 4.5 below
4.4.3 SW download to the NE
With the suitable cable and F connector adapter cable, connect the PC to F interface of the MAIN unit
Activate ECT (1320CT x.x.x) and execute the Login to the NE (see para.4.3.3 on page 130).
Perform the SW download with the following Craft Terminal commands:
SW Download Server Access Configuration
SW Download Init SW download (selecting the NEversion to be downloaded)
then, after about 1/4 hours, SW Download SW status Apply Action to activate the
software.
The software download can be performed also by using the Ethernet interface of the PC. In this case the
download lasts only few minutes.
133/348
4.5
NE Configuration
Once the software is downloaded and activated on the NE, the NE resets in order to use the downloaded
software version. This reset breaks the connection with the CT. The operator must, therefore, log in to the NE
again (see para. 4.4.1 on page 123).
NE configuration in the case of first installation is processed through the quick configuration procedure. This
procedure is launched from the CT through the menu Configuration/Quick Configuration (see para. 4.16.5 on
page 168). Follow the instructions provided on the corresponding screen. At the end of this procedure, the NE
resets and should be up and running if properly configured.
134/348
4.6
General Introduction to views and menus
This chapter describes the organization of the 946LUX50 NE., presented after the NE login.
First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed.
Additional advice is given for Navigation principles.
4.6.1 946LUX50 view organization

The 946LUX50 view below contains the following fields, which provide the operator with the information needed
to manage the NE:
Alarm synthesis by severity,
Alarm synthesis by domain,
Management status control panel,
View title,
View area,
Message/state area.
The Menu bar and the View area in the NE view allow you to perform all configuration and supervision operations
and display the selected item.
Alarm synthesis
Alarm synthesis
by severity
by domain
Menu
bar
Main
tool
bar
View
area
Figure 65 LUX50 Main View Organization
Management
state control panel
For the meaning of the icons in the Alarm synthesis by severity, Alarm synthesis by domain, and the
Management state control panel refer to Section 3 in this handbook.
135/348
4.6.1.1 View Area

The View Area manages all domains from which the user can start. It is organized into a tabbed panel, e.g. many
windows placed one upon another. Each window is selectable (placing it on top of the others) with a tab shown
on the top.
Each panel represents a set of functions. The area consist of the following sets:
Equipment
External Points
Line Interface
Performance
Radio
Protection Schemes (1 + 1 configurations only)
Loopback
The following figure shows the tabbed panel organization.

Each tab panel is labeled with the set name ( e.g. Equipment, Line Interface, etc ).
RESOURCE
TREE AREA
RESOURCE
LIST AREA
RESOURCE DETAIL AREA
Figure 66 View Areas

Each tabpanel (e.g. functionalities area) consists of four areas:
ResourceTree Area: displays all the available resources of the Radio NE.
ResourceList Area: may be represented by: Tabular View (e.g., Line Interface Domain) or Graphical
View (e.g., Equipment Domain).
136/348
Tabular View: displays a tabular representation of the selected resource. As default, no tabular
element is shown.
Graphical View: displays a graphical representation of the selected resource. As default, no
tabular element is shown.
ResourceDetail Area: displays detailed information of a selected item in the Resource List area. As
a default, no entry view is displayed as a consequence of the default behavior of the Resource List area.
4.6.1.2 Resource Tree Area

The Resource Area displays all the available resources in a tree structure like the protocol stack hierarchy.
The below figure shows an example of the resource tree instance (for the Line Interface functions):
Figure 67 Resource Tree Area
4.6.1.3 Selection Criteria

Each tree node consists of two symbols. The first symbol indicates the state of the structure e.g., if the symbol
is + the tree can be expanded to a lower level. The tree structure can be collapsed if the symbol is . Finally,
if there is no symbol, the node represents a leaf. The second symbol is the graphical representation of the
resource.
The user must select the resource by clicking with the mouse to carry out an action that depends on the type
of click.
Each resource listed above may be selected by using the mouse with a:
Single left click;
or Double left click
Single left click:

Left click one on the resource to highlight it. This selection activates the resource list area, e.g.,
every time the user selects a resource in the resource tree area, the corresponding Tabular or
Graphical representation is displayed in the Resource list area .
Double left click:
Using this type of selection on the items of the resource tree, the user can expand the tree structure
and activate the Resource list area displaying the same information described above. When the
tree node is expanded a double click will collapsethe tree node showing the same information in the
Resource list area.
4.6.1.4 Resource Detail Area
This area displays the detailed information of the selected object in the Resource list area. It also provides the
types of operations available
137/348
4.6.1.5 Button Policy

The possible buttons for selection are the following:
Apply
this button activates the changes, but does not close the window.
Cancel
window.
this button closes the window without modifying the parameters displayed in the
OK
this button activates the changes and closes the window
Close
this button closes the window
Help
this button provides help management for the functions of the supporting window.
Critical configuration choices could present a warning message asking for user confirmation before being
activated.
4.7
Introduction to the menu options
The menu bar lets you perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries.
For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs where
they are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this chapter.
From Chapter 4.8 on page 142 details and operating information on all views are given.
In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the menus
are:
Permanent Menus
Views: (first column)

To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters. See para.4.7.1 on page 139.
Configuration: (second column)

To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters (performance
monitoring, OverHead parameters). See para.4.7.1.1 on page 140.
Diagnosis: (third column)

To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory). See
para.4.7.1.2 on page 141.
Supervision: (fourth column)

To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling). See para.4.7.1.3 on page 141.
SW Download: (fifth column)

To manage the NE software (download, activation). See para. 4.7.1.4 on page 141.
Help: (last column)

To activate the online help.
The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented only when a specific option is selected.
Other Menus
Equipment
This menu is present only when the Equipment menu (selected in the View menu or in the
Equipment tab panel) is active. It lets you go back to the supporting equipment of the displayed
object.
138/348
4.7.1 Views menu introduction

The menu on the left side of the screen, lets you navigate among the views and to set some parameters, by
means of the following entries:
Previous:
Goes back to the previous screen of the application.
Open Object:
Not active.
Open in New Window:

Not active.
Duplicate View in New Window:

Not active.
Equipment:
Opens the Equipment view. Then the Equipment menu is available on the menu bar. See Chapter
4.9 on page 175.
External Points:
Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm. See Chapter 4.12 on page 198.
Line Interface:
Opens the Line Interface view to configure all the tributary ports. See Chapter 4.10 on page 184.
Performance:
Lets you manage the Performance monitoring. See Chapter 4.17 on page 229.
Radio:
Lets you manage all the functions relevant to the radio channels. See Chapter 4.11 on page 188.
Protection Scheme:
Lets you manage the Protection schemes in 1+1 configuration. See Chapter 4.14 on page 203.
Loopback:
Lets you manage the loopbacks available with the equipment. See Chapter 4.15 on page 214.
It is possible to access directly the menus for Equipment, External Points, Line Interface, Performance, Radio,
Protection Scheme, Loopback by clicking on the relevant tab panel above the view area.
139/348
Tab panel
Figure 68 Tab panel
4.7.1.1 Configuration menu introduction

This menu lets you set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by means
of the following entries:
NE Time:
Displays and sets the NE local time. See para. 4.8.1 on page 142.
Network configuration:
See para. 4.8.2 on page 143.
Alarm Severities:
System setting:
Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile. See para. 4.8.3 on page 151.
Allows system configuration, sets all the parameters for the NE setup. See para. 4.8.4 on page
156.
Quick configuration:
Allows a full system configuration through a guided procedure. See para. 4.8.5 on page 160.
140/348
4.7.1.2 Diagnosis menu introduction

This menu lets you get information on the NE, by means of the following entries:
Log Browsing:
Manages the events stored in the NE. (See para. 4.16.2 on page 222.) Opens the following menu
options:
Alarm log
Event log
Current configuration View:

Displays the current configuration of the NE. See para. 4.16.3 on page 223.
Summary Block Diagram View:

Displays a global logical view (strictly related to the physical implementation) highlighting a
synthesis of all the alarms and status conditions present in the system (ODU+IDU). See para.
4.16.5 on page 225.
Abnormal condition list:

Displays the manually operations active in the NE.
4.7.1.3 Supervision menu introduction

This menu lets you set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.13
on page 200) :
Access State:
Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS. (See para. 4.13.1 on page 200.) Opens
the following menu options:
OS
Requested
Restart NE:
Reset of the NE software. See para. 4.13.2 on page 201.
Feature Key Limitations:

Displays the limitations provided by the software feature key plugged into the main IDU. See para.
4.13.3 on page 202.
4.7.1.4 Download menu introduction

This menu lets you manage the NE software by means of the following entries (see chapter 4.18 on page 237)
:
Server Access Configuration:
Manages the configuration of the FTP server to be used for the software download to the NE. See
para. 4.18.1 on page 237.
Initi SW download:
Manages the software download to the NE. See para. 4.18.2 on page 238.
SW status:
Shows and manages the status of the software packages installed in the NE memory banks. See
para. 4.18.3 on page 240.
141/348
4.8
CONFIGURATION
4.8.1 NE Time
The NE local time can be displayed and/or reset to the OS time setting.
From the Configuration pull down menu, select the NE Time option.
The following dialog box opens, from which you can set the local NE time.
Figure 69 NE Time Dialog Box

The NE Time dialog box displays the current NE time and the current OS time.
To reset the NE time to the OS time, click on the Set NE Time With OS Time check box and click the Apply
pushbutton to validate.
With a click on the Daylight Saving Time (DST) check box the manual management of the summer time takes
place.
The Refresh pushbutton lets you read the time actually present in the NE.
142/348
4.8.2 Network Configuration

To access the Network Configuration option, select the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in the
following figure:
Figure 70 Network Configuration Menu

The Network Configuration lets you perform the following operations:
Local Configuration:
Defines the NE IP address
IP Configuration:
IP static routing configuration: defines the Host/Network destination address for IP static routing
OSPF Area configuration: defines the Open Shortest Path First configuration
IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces: defines the configuration of the interfaces
which use the PPP protocol
Routing information:
Displays the contents of the NEs routing table.
The options are described in next paragraphs.
143/348
4.8.2.1 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu.
Select the Network Configuration option and then, from the cascading menu, the Local Configuration
option.
The dialog box opens (figure below) which lets you to configure the local IP address of the NE.
This local IP address is the IP address associated witth the F interface and with the other interfaces which use
the PPP protocol (the 3 NMS channels).
The Apply button is used to confirm the data contained in the dialog box and closes it.
The Close button closes the dialog.
The Help button provides some useful information on the dialog.
Figure 71 Local Configuration Dialog Box

4.8.2.2 IP Configuration
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select Network Configuration and then select the IP
Configuration option from the cascading menu ( see following figure).
Figure 72 IP Configuration Screen
144/348
4.8.2.3 IP static routing configuration

The dialogbox opens and lets you set the parameters for IP Static Routing Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
IP Address:
lets you define the IP address necessary to reach a specific Host
IP Mask:
lets you define the IP Mask to reach a network
Default Gateway IP Address:
lets you define the address of the next hop gateway
Interface type:
lets you use point to point interfaces made available by the NE.
The New button is used to insert a new static route.

The Delete button is used to delete the selected static route.
The Close button closes the dialog.
Figure 73 IP Static Routing Configuration Screen

By pressing the Create button the following screen opens.
In the Host or Network Address Choice field select:
Host to address to a single IP address;
145/348
Network to address to a range of IP addresses.
In the Default Gateway or Point to Point I/F Choice select:

Default Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet interface;
Point to Point Interface Index for the NMS channels (NMSRF, NMS1V11, NMS2V11)
Figure 74 Create Static Routing
If the Default Gateway IP Address radio button has been selected in the above screen, set the Default
Gateway IP Address in the corresponding field below.
146/348
If the Point To Point Interface Index radio button has been selected, the following dialog box opens.
Figure 75 Create Static Routing: Point To Point Interface Choice

In this screen, one of the 3 NMS channels (NMSRF, NMS1V11, NMS2V11) can be selected.
147/348
4.8.2.4 OSPF Area configuration

The dialogbox opens (figure below) and lets you configure the parameters for OSPF (Open Shortest Path First)
Area Table Configuration.
The following fields and data are present:
OSPF Area IP Address
OSPF Area Range Mask (Network Mask)
OSPF Area Stub Flag (used to restrict the NEs routing table to routes belonging to its own area)
The fields give summary information that includes all the addresses (specific to a NE and to a Network) in an
Area.
The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change on the NE and close the view; the view is visible
until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.
Figure 76 OSPF Area configuration screen
In the screen, enter the IP address, the IP mask and select the flag (True/False).
148/348
4.8.2.5 IP Address Configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces

The following dialog box opens and lets you Enable or Disable the three NMS channels, which use the PPP
protocol.
The Apply button is used to accept a configuration change in the dialog box and then closes it; the dialog is
visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the data.
Figure 77 IP Address configuration of PointToPoint Interfaces screen

The Mode parameter lets you configure the NMS V11 working mode (see page 172).
DTE
DCE
Codirectional
149/348
Supervision
With
946LUX50
software
NMS2
Routing
NMS1
Radio
MSU1
This parameter cannot be configured in the case of NMS RF and, therefore, is always set to Not Used in this
case.
NMS1 NMS2
Figure 78 Available NMS Interfaces

4.8.2.6 Routing information
Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select Network Configuration and then the Routing information
option from the cascading menu,.
The following dialog box opens:
Figure 79 Routing information screen

This screen is a readonly screen and displays the IP routes currently defined in the NEs routing table.
The Refresh button lets you refresh some of the information shown in the screen. (IP Routing field is not
refreshed.)
The possible values for the IP Routing Local PointtoPoint Interface field are:
1: NMSRF interface
2: NMS1V11 interface
3: NMS2V11 interface
4: F interface
6: Loopback interface
The Close button closes the dialog without changing the window.
150/348
4.8.3 Alarm Severities

By selecting the Alarm Severities option from the Configuration menu the Alarm Severities Profiles screen
appears.
In this screen in the Profile Name field are listed the 4 default Alarm Severity Profiles:
Profile No Alarms. With this profile all alarms are disabled.
Profile Primary Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms. General rules used
to define the alarms severity:
MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);
MINOR or WARNING (according to the impact of the alarm): the alarm doesnt affects the service
(with the exception of High BER alarm, for which MINOR alarm severity is defined, even if it is
service affecting).
Profile No Remote Alarms. This profile enables the emission of the primary alarms plus Early
Warning and Low BER alarms. This profile uses the following rules to define the alarms severity:
MAJOR: the alarm affects the service (it is service affecting);
MINOR: the alarm is potentially service affecting but a protection has recovered the service;
WARNING: the alarm cannot affect the service (independent from any protection).
Profile All Alarms. This profile enables the emission of all the alarms (including AIS and RDI). This
profile uses the same severity as the Primary alarm profile, the only difference is that Early Warning,
Low BER, AIS and RDI alarms are emitted.
The rules used to define the alarm severity are the same as for the Primary alarm profile.
In case of alarms affecting a protection, different severities are used for SA and NSA. The same severity is used
both for SA and NSA in case of service independent alarms.
The rules used to define the profile alarms severity described above, are not applied to the housekeeping
alarms. In this case, in order to enhance the flexibility, a different severity is assigned to each alarm profile (WAR,
MIN and MAJ).
151/348
Figure 80 Alarm Severities Profile

Two buttons are available in the Alarm Severities Profile screen:
Close: to close the screen.
Clone: to create a new Alarm Severity Profile. To create a clone refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 153.
Only 3 new profiles can be created.

An Alarm Profile is the complete set of the equipment alarms with their severity in case of Service Affecting
situation and No Service Affecting situation.
Each alarm has its Service Affecting and No Service Affecting attribute, which can differ according to the Alarm
Severity Profile.
To some objects in the equipment (overhead alarm, input housekeeping alarm, tributaries etc.) can be assigned
an Alarm Profile.
To do this association:
select the tab panel (Equipment, Line Interface, etc.) in which the object to be associated to a specific
Alarm Severity Profile is present;
select the object;
select the Configuration menu in the relevant Resource Detail Area;
select in the Alarm Profile field the Alarm Profile to be associated.
152/348
4.8.3.1 How to create a new Alarm Severity Profile
Select the Alarm Profile to be cloned from the Alarm Severities Profile screen.
Click the Clone pushbutton.
The following Clone Alarm Severity Profile screen appears.
Figure 81 Name of a cloned alarm profile
Enter the name to be assigned to the new Alarm Profile and click on Apply.
Select again the Alarm Severity option from the Configuration menu.
Select the newly created Alarm Profile (Link 1 in the following screen).
153/348
Figure 82 Clone of an Alarm Severity Profile
4 buttons are available in this screen :

Close: to close the screen without any change
Rename: to change the name of the Alarm Severity Profile
Modify: to modify the Alarm Severity Profile
Delete: to delete the Alarm Severity Profile.
Click on the Modify button.
To modify the severity of an alarm, click the Service Affecting field of the appropriate alarm and select
a new severity (following screen).
154/348
Figure 83 Selection of a new severity in the Service Affecting field
155/348
To modify the severity of an alarm, click on the No Service Affecting field, then click on the suitable
alarm, and select a new severity as shown in the followiing screen:
Figure 84 Selection of a new severity in the No Service Affecting field
To save the changes in the Alarm Severity Profile click on Apply. (By clicking on Cancel you quit the
Alarm Severity Profile screen without any change).
4.8.4 System Settings

This menu allows system configuration and lets you set all the parameters for the NE setup.
The main window provides 3 tabbedpanels, one for each type of function to be managed:
NE configuration
Link Identifier
Overhead (Not available with the IDU Light.)
156/348
4.8.4.1 NE Configuration
The user can view the NE configuration by selecting the NE Parameters tabbed panel.
The window displayed below will appear.
Figure 85 System Settings: NE configuration

The Type field shows the current NE configuration.
The Structure area displays the market, capacity, modulation and, when possible, the ability to change it.
The Market field shows the market type, which in the case of 946LUX50 is ETSI.
The Capacity field shows the data capacity on the NE.
The information related to the modulation type is shown in the Modulation field. The possible values are
4QAM and 16QAM.
The capacity and the modulation can be modified by selecting a different type according to the Capacity and
Modulation table below and then selecting the Apply button to send the new value.
Capacity and Modulation

Capacity
Modulation
2xE1
4QAM
4xE1
4QAM
8xE1
4QAM / 16QAM
16xE1
4QAM / 16QAM
1xE3 + 1E1
4QAM / 16QAM
157/348
4.8.4.2 Link Indentifier

The Link Identifier area, in the System Settings dialog, displays the current values of the parameters related
to link management.
The operator choices are sent to the NE by clicking on the related Apply button. The parameters involved are:
Expected Value: this field is the link identifier value expected by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).
Sent Value: this field is the link identifier value transmitted by the NE (allowed values: 0 to 31).
Figure 86 System Settings: Link Identifier
The operator choice will be applied by selecting the related Apply button.
158/348
4.8.4.3 Overhead
The Overhead tabbed panel (screen below) identifies the parameters for the management of the phone
number.
Figure 87 Overhead Configuration
The field Phone Number in the Order Wire Configuration area allows the operator to read and write the
station number associated to the Engineering Order Wire to be used in the selective call. Possible values are:
011999 (with no more than one zero digit in the number).
The phone number can be enabled or disabled by selecting the corresponding buttons.
The parameter will be sent to NE by clicking on the related Apply button.
159/348
4.8.5 Quick Configuration Procedure

This procedure allows a full system configuration through a guided process, based on a reduced set of screens.
The related windows will be displayed by a Wizard Tool according to a specific order.
To start this application, select the Quick Configuration option from the Configuration menu. This window
that opens is the first step of the procedure.
The procedure consists of different steps according to the configuration:
1+0 configurations:
6 steps for the simplified configuration
11 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 5)
1+1 configurations:
7 steps for the simplified configuration
12 steps for the advanced configuration (the advanced configuration can be activated in step 6)
The table below lists all the Quick Config steps involved depending on the NE configuration and the use of the
Advanced Configuration option:
Step
1+0
1+0
Adv. Config
1+1
1+1
Adv. Config
NE configuration
Tributaries
configuration
Frame
configuration
Restoration criteria
Channels
configuration
Local IP address
configuration
OSPF area
configuration
IP static routes
configuration
NMSRF interface
configuration
NMS1V11
configuration
10
NMS2V11
configuration
10
11
Summary
11
12
Note on the use of the buttons available in the screens:

Back: by clicking on this button the procedure goes back to the previous step
Next: by clicking on this button the procedure goes on the next step
Finish: this button is active only in the last step. By clicking on this button the operator confirms the
configuration and the new parameters are sent to the equipment.
Cancel: by clicking on this button the operator quits the procedure without any change in the
configuration.
160/348
Help: by clicking on this button the operator calls the helpon line.
The following screens correspond to the most complete procedure for a 1+1 configuration with the Advanced
Configuration option which includes all the Quick Configuration steps.
Figure 88 Quick Installation Procedure: NE Configuration (Step 1)

Step 1
The first step provides a screen allowing configuration of NE parameters:
Type configuration.
The possible values are:
1 + 0: unprotected configuration with a classic IDU
1 + 0 L: unprotected configuration with a light IDU
1 + 0 EXT: unprotected configuration with service channel extension

1 + 1 HSB: hot standby protected configuration
1 + 1 HSBSD: hot standby protected configuration with space diversity
1 + 1 FD: frequency diversity protected configuration
1 + 1 HSBMP: 1 + 1 HSB with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
1 + 1 HSBSDMP: 1 + 1 HSBSD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
1 + 1 FDMP: 1 + 1 FD with multiplexer/demultiplexer protection
Market:
161/348
ETSI (read only)

IDU configuration:
Depending on the selected configuration type above, the main unit type an be set with one of
the following values:
IDU Light 4x2 Mbps (1 + 0L configuration only)
IDU Main 4x2 Mbps
IDU Main 8x2 Mbps
IDU Main 16x2 Mbps
IDU Main 34 Mbps
The Extension unit is automatically updated depending on the selected configuration Type and
Main Unit Type.
If an Extension unit is present, Extension Service Channels 3 and 4 can be configured with the
following values. These values must comply with physically connected ESC3 and ESC4 daughter
boards inside the extennsiion unit:
ESC 64 kbps G703
ESC 4wire Audio and EQ
ESC 64 kbps V11
ESC 64 kbps V28
ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V11
ESC 9600 or 2x4800 bps V28
ODU configuration contains the following fields:
Model: ODU Model connected to the equipment. Possible values are:
ODU LX/UX 7/8 GHz 4QAM for A9400 LX/UX
ODU LX/UX 7/8 GHz 16QAM for A9400 LX/UX
ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM with RTPC
ODU UX 13 GHz 4QAM, no RTPC
ODU UX 13 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 15 GHz Standard Power
ODU UX 15 GHz High Power
ODU UX 15 GHz 4QAM with RTPC
ODU UX 18 GHz Standard Power
ODU UX 18 GHz High Power
ODU UX 23 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 23 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 25 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 25 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX 38 GHz 4QAM
ODU UX 38 GHz 16QAM
ODU UX Flat
Duplexer: Depending on the selected ODU Type, the list of duplexers available with this
type of ODU is displayed. For example, when ODU UX 38 GHz 4QAM is selected, the duplexer list
is the following:
162/348
Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Inf. (for 1 or 2 Tx Band)

Dupl. 1260 MHz LO Sup. (for 1P or 2P Tx Band)
Other Duplexer
For additional information on LO Inf. and LO Sup. see section 2.9 begining on page 57.
The special choice Other Duplexer allows you to configure Rx Frequency independently of
the Tx Frequency. In all other cases, only Tx Frequency can be confiigured, Rx Frequency being
deduced from Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.
RF Loopback Support: with some ODU models RF loopback unit is optional. In this case, this
field allows you to indicate if RF loopback is preset or not. In case of ODUs for which RF loopback
unit is not, this field is automatically set to the appropriate value.
WARNING: In the case of a 1 + 1 configuration, only one kind of ODU can be configured for
both channels.
163/348
Step 2
The screen shown below provides the fields to set the Structure of the Frame configuration (Capacity and
Modulation).
The capacity implies the choice of modulation; for example, if the tributary structure is 2E1 only 4QAM
modulation scheme is supported.
The association between Capacity and Modulation is shown on page 157.
Figure 89 Quick Installation Procedure: Frame Configuration (Step 2)

In the screen displayed above (and in the following Steps), the Back button is enabled also. It allows the
operator to turn back and change the parameters configured in the previous screen.
To go to the next step click on button Next.
To go back to the previous step click on button Back.
164/348
Step 3
Step 3 allows the operator to choose, for each tributary configured, the signal mode status. Possible values
are Unframed and Disabled.
Figure 90 Quick Installation Procedure: Tributaries Configuration (Step 3)

By clicking on one of the facility buttons (All Unframed or All Disabled), the operator can configure all the
tributaries at once; otherwise he can configure each tributary separtely by selecting the related value from the
relevant scroll list.
165/348
Step 4 (1 + 1 Configurations Only)
Figure 91 Quick Installation Procedure: Restoration Criteria (Step 4)

Step 4 shows the operator the restoration criteria (revertive or not revertive) for the 3 possible protections
available in the 1+1 configurations:
Radio protection
Mux/Demux protection
HSB Tx protection
The restoration criteria values depend upon the selected configuration type in step 1 (1 + 1 HSB, 1 + 1 FDMP,
etc.). These values cannot be modified by the operator.
For radio protection restoration criteria values, see 4.14.2.
166/348
Step 5
Step 5 allows the operator to define the basic parameters for each configured channel. The related screen is
shown below:
Figure 92 Quick Configuration Procedure: Channels Configuration (Step 5)
The Channel Configuration screen allows you to configure the Tx power and Frequencies of the ODU(s).
Depending on the choices made in Step 1 (configuration type, duplexer type), some values could be read only.
If the configuration type is 1 + 0, only one channel needs to be configured. In 1 + 1 configurations both
channels (1 and 0) need to be configured.
If the configuration type is 1 + 1 HSB, Tx frequency for channel 0 is automatically set according to Tx
frequency for channel 1, while Tx Power can be set independently on both channels.
If the configuration type is 1 + 1 FD, Tx Frequency has to be configured on both channels, while Tx
Power on channel 0 is synchronized with Tx Power on channel 1.
If the configured duplexer type is Other Duplexer, the Rx frequency value can be configured
independently of the Tx Frequency. In all other cases, the Rx Frequency value is deduced automatically
from the Tx Frequency and duplexer shift.
If the configured IDU Main Unit is not IDU Light 4x2 Mbps, and if the configured ODU is ODU UX Flat,
the ATPC mode can be enabled or disabled (otherwise ATPC is forced to disabled, due to the fact that
it is not supported).

167/348
Step 6
Step 6 performs the network configuration. This window allows the operator to configure the NE IP address.
Figure 93 Quick Configuration Procedure: Local IP Address (Step 6)

For an advanced network configuration the operator must select the Advanced Configuration flag.
If the flag has been selected, the screens in the next steps allow the operator to perform a complete configuration
of all the Network parameters.
168/348
Step 7 (Advanced Configuration Only)

Step 7 allows you to configure the OSPF Area.
Figure 94 Quick Configuration Procedure: OSPF Area Configuration (Step 7)

If the OSPF area must be a stub area, make the selection in the Stub Area check box.
LUX50 supports one single OSPF area. This area cannot be a backbone area (e.g., area 0.0.0.0 is not
authorized).
Enter the OSPF area number in the IP address field.
Enter the OSPF range mask in the Range Mask field.
IMPORTANT: All NEs belonging to the same OSPF area must have the exact same range mask value.
169/348

The following windows for Network Configuration allow complete IP configuration.
Step 8 lets you configure static routes.
Figure 95 Quick Configuration Procedure: IP Static Routes Configuration (Step 8)

LUX50 NEs can have up to 10 static IP routes defined.
Each static route can be either a route to a host or a route to a gateway.
If Host Address is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:
Host IP address
IP Mask (if Network address is slected).
If Gateway Address is selected, the following parameters have to be configured:

Default gateway IP address
If PPP Id is selected, the PPP interface used for this route has to be defined among the NEs three
PPP interfaces (NMS RF, NMS V11#1, NMS V11#2).

170/348

Step 9 allows the configuration of the NMSRF channel:
Figure 96 Quick Configuration Procedure: NMSRF Interface Configuration (Step 9)

The NMSRF interface is a communication interface based on the use of an inframe RF proprietary 64 kbit/s
channel. Through the NMSRF interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or
Craft Terminal) station.
The NMSRF channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS RF field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.
171/348

Step 10 allows the configuration of the NMS1V11 interface:
Figure 97 Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS1V11 Interface Configuration (Step 10)

Through the NMS1V11 interface the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft
Terminal) in the same station.
The NMS1V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS1 V11 field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field indicate whether or not OSPF is used.
In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:
DTE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode
DCE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode
Codirectional Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode
172/348

Step 11 allows the configuration of the NMS2V11 interface.
Figure 98 Quick Configuration Procedure: NMS2V11 Interface Configuration (Step 11)

Using the NMS2V11 interface, the NE can exchange management messages with an OS (or Craft Terminal)
in the same station.
The NMS2V11 channel can be Enabled or Disabled by selection in the NMS2 V11 field.
In the Routing IP Protocol field, indicate whether or not OSPF is used.
In the PPP_MODE field the following selections can be made:
DTE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DCE mode
DCE Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in DTE mode
Codirectional Mode:
Interface with equipment configured in codirectional mode
173/348
Step 12
Step 12 is the last step. The screen shown below summarizes all the parameters configured during this
procedure and some relevant parameters with default values.
Figure 99 Quick Configuration Procedure: Summary (Step 12)

All the parameters can still be changed by clicking on the Back button. The operator can navigate back to
the desired screen and set the new values.
At the end, the operator confirms the selections by pressing the Finish button. All the parameters will be
stored and sent to the NE.
NOTE: This operation can take a few minutes.
NOTE: In most cases, the NE will reset at the end of the process so that the new configuration parameters can
be taken into account.
174/348
4.9
EQUIPMENT
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for Equipment Management.
The equipment domain deals with the management of the NE as a whole and its physical components (subrack,
boards,...)
The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for a 1+0 Radio configuration:
Equipment Status
ODU
ODU Status
IDU
IDU Status
Figure 100 1+0 Radio Equipment view
175/348
The main screen of the Equipment tab panel is shown below for the 1+1 HSBMP.
Equipment Status
ODU
ODU Status
IDU
IDU Status
Figure 101 1+1 HSBMP view

The Resource List Area shows a graphical representation of the Equipment, which consists of an IDU and one
or two ODUs.
A colored ball gives information on the status of the associated object. The color differs according to the severity
of the alarms currently active on ths object:
Green: no alarm
White: indetermination alarm active (not operative)
Cyanic: warning alarm active
Yellow: minor alarm active
Brown: major alarm active
Red: critical alarm active
176/348
4.9.1 IDU level

To enter the IDU level click on the IDU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the IDU image in
the Resource Detail Area.
1+0 configuration
The following screen will appear.
IDU Status
MAIN IDU BOARD Status

MAIN IDU BOARD
IDU
Figure 102 1+0 IDU view
177/348
The IDU consists of 1 board, the IDU Main board.

1+1 configuration
The following screen will appear.
IDU
IDU Status
MAIN IDU BOARD

Status
MAIN IDU BOARD

EXTENSION IDU BOARD
EXTENSION IDU
BOARD Status
Figure 103 1+1 IDU view
The IDU consists of 2 boards:

Main board
Extension board
178/348
4.9.1.1 Board level

To enter a board click on the object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the board image in the Resource
Detail Area.
For example, following screen in shows the MAIN IDU board:
BOARD Status
Figure 104 Main IDU board view
179/348
4.9.1.2 ODU level

To enter the ODU level click on the ODU object in the Resource Tree Area or double click on the ODU image
in the Resource Detail Area.
The following screen will appear in case of a UX ODU.
Figure 105 UX ODU view
180/348
The following screen will appear in case of UXFlat ODU:
Figure 106 UXFlat ODU view
181/348
4.9.1.3 Alarms
The Alarms tab panel provides the fault mangement, which checks the current state of alarms related to the
selected object: (See Appendix 7, page 332.)
Figure 107 Alarm tab panel for a selected object

The alarm tab panel has one row for each possible alarm, but only rows related to the active alarms are
highlighted. When the alarm disappears it is automatically cleared in the screen.
By putting a tick in the Include alarms from subnodes box the alarms currently active in the subnodes of
the object will also appear.
For every alarm the following information is given:
Severity: the severity associated to the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile
Event Time: the time of the generation of the alarm
Entity: the entity involved in the alarm
Probable Cause: the probable cause of the alarm
Managed Object Class: the class of the alarm.
182/348
4.9.1.4 Configuration
The User Label field displays the label associated to the selected node in the tree.
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate to the object alarms a particular Alarm Profile: a default alarm profile
or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 153). To associate a
different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and make the selection among the available Alarm Profile.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
Figure 108 Configuration tab panel for a selected object
4.9.1.5 Remote Inventory

The information about the unit can be read in the Remote Inventory (when available) panel in the Resource
Detail Area as the following window shows:
Figure 109 Remote Inventory tab panel for a selected object
183/348
4.10
LINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the type of functions available for Line Interface Management.
4.10.1 Tributaries
The Line Interface domain deals with the management of the aggregate frame and tributary ports (line side).
The Line Interface view allows the user to manage the resources of a PDH signal, i.e., frames, tributary ports
(line), etc.
This domain view consists of the following areas:
Resource Tree Area: displays the frames and tributary ports sorted by the channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in the tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the selected objects properties in the
list area. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.
Figure 110 Line Interface View

The Resource List Area provides information about the tributaries.
Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)
Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
Channel Number: the channel identifier
Rate/Modulation: the bit rate of the tributary
Signal Mode: the type of frame (Unframed/Disabled)
To change the Signal Mode, select the tributary and change the Signal Mode field in the Resource Detail Area.
184/348
4.10.1.1 Alarm
The fault management checks the current state of alarms related to the selected tributary.
It is provided by the alarm panel like the one explained in para. 4.9.1.5.
The window shown below gives you access to all available functions for a tributary port.
The managed tributary types are E1 and E3.
To define the involved ports, the channel must be selected in the tree view. Consequently, the selection of the
desired tributary port in the tabular view allows the Resource Detail List to show the available functions for the
individual resource.
Figure 111 Tributary Configuration Panel

The information related to a PDH frame is shown above, where the fields are read only:
Interface Type (E1,E3 etc.)
Port Number: the port for a given channel and type of port
Channel Number: the channel identifier
The fields which can be changed are:

Signal Mode
Alarm Profile
Signal Mode
The possible values are:
Unframed
Disabled
The current state can be modified by selecting a different signal mode value and then clicking on the Apply
button to send the new value to the NE.
Alarm Profile
The Alarm Profile field lets you associate a particular Alarm Profile with the tributary alarms: a default alarm
profile or an Alarm Profile previously created by the operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1). To associate a different
Alarm Profile, click on the selection button and select from among the available profiles.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the No Alarm profile.
185/348
4.10.1.3 Test
The Test tab allows you to perform certain tests on the selected tributary by inserting a pseudo random binary
sequence (PRBS) into this tributary at the transmission side and by measuring the Bit Error Rate on its reception
side.
Figure 112 Tributary Test Panel

PRBS insertion and corresponding BER measure can be started/stopped using the Start/Stop button.
The inserted PRBS sequence of (215 1) is inverted.
When PRBS insertion is activated, an abnormal condition is raised on the tributary in order to remind the
operator that the NE is currently not working in normal condition. This abnormal condition disappears when the
PRBS insertion is stopped.
The measures reported on BER measure are the Current BER measure value on the selected tributary, along
with Min and Max BER measure values received since the beginning of the measurement.
NOTE 1: PRBS can only be inserted on one tributary at a time. Therefore, make sure that PRBS is not currently
inserted on another tributary (this can be done easily by checking abnormal condition list) before trying to insert
it on a new tributary.
NOTE 2: Using the Start/Stop button for PRBS insertion in BER measure starts or stops both together,
however, they can be used independantly of each other.
186/348
4.10.2 NMS Interfaces

Line Interface view also allows management of alarms related to the 3 NMS interfaces:
Figure 113 NMS Interface Alarms
Using the Alarms tab, the operator can check if an alarm is present on the selected NMS interface. The
operator can also change the alarm profile for each of the NMS interfaces through the Configuration tab
187/348
4.11
RADIO
The Radio domain view allows the user to manage the resources of the radio transmission channel.
A Radio NE consists of one or two radio channels with a set of functional blocks (tributary ports, radio ports etc).
Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the object s properties selected in the list
area. This area allows you to execute the available commands for the selected resource.
Figure 114 Radio Domain View

Six tab panels are present in the Resource Detail Area:
Alarms: shows the active alarms (refer to para. 4.11.1 on page 189)
Configuration: configures some radio parameters (refer to para. 4.11.2 on page 189)
Frequency: sets the Tx/Rx RF frequency (refer to para. 4.11.3 on page 190)
RTPC & ATPC: sets the Tx Power (refer to para. 4.11.4 on page 191)
Power Meas: performs the Tx and Rx power measurements (refer to para. 4.11.5 on page 192).
BER Meas: refers to BER measurement (refer to para. 4.11.6 on page 197)
188/348
4.11.1 Alarm
The fault management allows you to check the current state of the alarms related to the selected object.
It is provided by the alarm panel like that shown in para. 4.9.1.3 on page 182.
4.11.2 Configuration
The Radio Frequency window gives you access to all the available functions for a Radio PDH port.
To define the involved port, first select the port/channel in the tabular view: this selection enables the Resource
Detail list to show the available functions for the single resource.
4.11.2.1 Tx Local Mute
The information related to the transmitter status is shown in the Status field. To change the transmitter status
choose the desired value (ON for Tx Squelched and OFF for Tx not Squelched) and press the related Apply
button.
4.11.2.2 Alarm Profile
The field Alarm Profile allows to associate a particular Alarm Profile to the object alarms: a default alarm profile
or an Alarm Profile previously created by the Operator (refer to para. 4.8.3.1 on page 153). To associate a
different Alarm Profile click on the selection button and select among the available Alarm Profile.
The default associated Alarm Profile is the Primary Alarm profile.
189/348
4.11.3 Frequency
This menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the frequency parameters.
The information shown concerns the port/channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
Figure 115 Radio Frequency menu

4.11.3.1 Tx Radio Frequency
The Tx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of the tabbed window shows the current value of the
transmission radio frequency (expressed in kHz). To change this parameter write the new value in the field and
press the Apply button.
The new value must be within the allowed radio frequency range. The allowed range is shown in Min/Max
Value fields. See section 2.9 on page 57 for available frequencies.
4.11.3.2 Rx Radio Frequency

The Rx Freq field in the Frequency Value area of the tabbed window shows the current value of the receive
radio frequency (expressed in kHz).
In most cases it is automatically changed as a consequence of the definition of the Tx frequency according to
the Frequency Shifter.
If the configured duplexer is Other Duplexer, Rx frequency can be configured independently from the Tx
frequency.
190/348
4.11.4 RTPC & ATPC

The RTPC & ATPC menu lets you read and, if necessary, set the Tx power parameters.
The shown information is related to the channel selected in the Resource Tabular View.
Figure 116 RTPC & ATPC

4.11.4.1 ATPC
Depending on the configured IDU and ODU (ATPC is supported with IDU main classic and ODU UXFlat only),
ATPC can be Enabled or Disabled.
When ATPC is enabled, the ATPC Max Value parameter in ATPC Range area, and the Low Power
parameter in ATPC Rx Threshold area need to be configured in order for ATPC regulation loop to work
properly.
ATPC Max Value parameter allows to define the maximum Tx power level at which the NE is
authorized to transmit. The ATPC mean value is readonly and is set to the minimum RTPC level.
ATPC Rx Threshold parameter defines the Rx power level below which the ATPC regulation loop
will start increasing the transmission power level in order to compensate for the low Rx power level.
On the other hand, the ATPC regulation loop will start decreasing the transmission power level when
the measured Rx power level goes above (ATPC Rx Threshold + 4 dB).
4.11.4.2 Tx Nominal Power

The Nominal Power field in the RTPC area is a readonly field and shows the nominal value of the
transmitted power (expressed in dBm).
191/348
4.11.4.3 Tx Current Power

The Tx Power field in the RTPC area shows the current value of Tx power (expressed in dBm), when the
ODU supports RTPC and ATPC is disabled, it is possible to modify this value by entering the new value and
by pressing the related Apply button.
The new value must be within the allowed transmitted power range. This range is shown in the Power Value
label of RTPC area.
When ATPC is enabled, the Tx Power value cannot be modified.
4.11.5 Power Measurement

The Power Measurements capability is available by selecting the Power Meas tab shown circled in the
resource detail view below:
Figure 117 Power Measurements

The Measurement screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measurement.
Measurement interval fields allow the operator to set the timeduration of the measurement. The default
is Days: 7, Hours: 0, Minutes: 0. A 7day measurement interval is also the maximum allowed interval.
Sample time field is the period between two consecutive measurement samples. The choice is among 2, 4,
6, 30, 60 sec.
The last section of the dialog refers to an optional Log file.
192/348
By selecting Create File the log file is created and a default path and name for this file is displayed to the
operator. The file is stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.3 directory.
The log file contains the sample value and records the measurement up to a maximum dimension ( 7 days for
a 2 second sample time).
By clicking on the Start button the screen Power Measurement Graphic appears.
The Power Measurement Graphic is available only if the CT is connected to the NE.
The screen shows the Tx and Rx measurements related to the local NE:
Figure 118 Power Measurement Graphic

Using this screen the operator can see, in real time, the power transmitted by the local transmitter (Tx) and the
power received by the local receiver (Rx).
The top graphic screen area shows the TX curve, while the bottom area shows the Rx curve.
The top of the screen offers all the characteristics present in the current measurement:
Radio channel: gives the symbolic name associated to the radio channel being analyzed;
Sample time: indicates the frequency used to send the measurement requests to NE;
Start time: is the first request time;
Stop time: is the interval time selected in the previous parameters window, added to the start time;
Time: is the current response time;
Log File: is the complete pathname of the file where the received values are stored.
193/348
By clicking on Show details box, on the left side of the Power Measurement Graphic, a new table appears:
Figure 119 Power Measurement Details

This table shows the following relevant values of the received and transmitted power:
Tx Local End
Max TX local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
Current TX local value and its current date.
Min. TX local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
Rx Local End
Max Rx local value and date when this value was received for the first time.
Current Rx local value and its current date.
Min. Rx local value and its current date when this value was received for the first time.
PTx and PRx levels software reading tolerance is:

PTx = Real Value 3dB
PRx = Real Value 5dB
194/348
4.11.5.1 How to read a Power Measurement file

Click on Read File field and press on the Select File button. The directory of the CT automatically opens to
navigate and get the power measurement file.
As default, the measurement files are stored in the ALCATEL/CTKv3.0.3 directory and have the extension
.txt.
Figure 120 Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen

Select the desired file and click the Open button to open the file.
Figure 121 Example of Power Measurement File Reading
195/348
The button in the lower part of the window lets the graph display changes within the measurement interval.
Select the .txt file and click with the right mouse button to open the .txt file with a text editor (e.g. WordPad) and
see the power information in tabular mode:
Figure 122 Example of Power Measurement File Reading (with WordPad)
196/348
4.11.6 BER Measures

The BER Meas tab lets you perform Bit Error Rate measures on each radio channel.
Figure 123 BER Measures
The BER Measures screen allows the operator to set initial parameters for the required measure.
Sample Time field defines the period between two consecutive measure samples.
Clicking on Start button triggers the measurements.
Displayed values are the Current BER measure value, along with Min and Max BER measure values,
corresponding to minimum and maximum BER values encountered since the beginning of the measure.
Measures will go on until the operator clicks the Stop button.
197/348
4.12
EXTERNAL POINTS
This chapter describes the types of functions offered to the user for External Points Management.
There are two types of external points: input and output external points.
When you click on the tree root, the tree will be expanded according to the equipment configuration.
A single left click selection of a tree element causes the activation of the corresponding Tabular representation
displayed in the Resource list area. A click on a row in the Resoure list area opens the Configuration menu
in the Resource Detail Area.
4.12.1 Input External Points

An input external point is described by the following parameters:
Id: identification number
User Label: associates a userfriendly name to an external point
External State: describes the state (on/off)
Alarm Profile: describes the associated Alarm Profile
The lower part provides the possible parameters, which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can
modify the User Label and can associate a different Alarm Profile by clicking on the Selection button.
The operator choices will be sent to NE after selecting the Apply button.
Figure 124 Input External Points View
198/348
4.12.2 Output External Point

An output external point is described by the following parameters:
Id: identification number
User Label: associate a userfriendly name to an external point
External State: describes the state (on/off)
The lower part provides the possible parameters which can be modified; after a row selection, the user can
modify the User Label and External State of the external point selected (On=active; Off=not active).
The operator choices will be sent to NE by clicking on the Apply button.
Figure 125 Output External Point View
199/348
4.13
SUPERVISION
4.13.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the access conflicts of the OS and the
CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
If the LAC is access denied, it means that the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the
NE configuration (it can only read). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
If the LAC is granted, it means that the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key symbol
has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is requested, it means that the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a reply.
However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:
Alarm reception and processing,
Performance processing,
Switching back to the OS access state.
The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:
4.13.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State cascading
menu as shown in the following figure:
Figure 126 Craft access state configuration from the Equipment NE view in OS mode
The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.
If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state and can be
managed by a Craft Terminal.
200/348
4.13.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state
Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then from the Access State cascading menu, select the OS option.
From the confirmation dialog box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation.
The NE is now managed by the OS.
The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is managed by a craft
terminal or by the OS.
Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the NE. When the
communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the communication and forces the state
existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft Terminal access can be denied or granted).
4.13.2 Restart NE
The RESTART operation is a software reset and can be executed in normal traffic conditions.
From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Restart NE option.
Figure 127 Restart NE call

The following dialog box opens.
Figure 128 Restart NE confirmation

Click the Yes button to confirm the restart NE operation
Click the No button to abort the restart NE operation.
201/348
4.13.3 Software Feature key

From the Supervision cascading menu, select the Feature key option.
In this screen the information read from the feature key plugged into the main IDU are shown.
Figure 129 Feature Key Screen
202/348
4.14
PROTECTION SCHEMES
This domain is present with 1+1 configurations only.

Resource Tree Area: displays the radio ports sorted by channel number.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the selected resource in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
allows you to perform the available functions for the selected resource.
By clicking on the tree root shown below, the tree will be expanded according to the supported protection
schemes.
Figure 130 Protection Schemes
A single left click selection of an element tree causes the activation of the corresponding graphical
representation displayed in the Resource list area.
Three 1+1 protection schemes are available, depending on the NE configuration:
Mux/Demux protection: EPS protection in Tx side
Radio protection: EPS protection in Rx side
HSB protection: Hot Standby protection
To see the current position of the switches enter the menu Diagnosis > Summary Block Diagram View (refer
to para. 4.16.5 on page 225).
The Mux/Demux protection corresponds to the Switch Tx
The Radio protection corresponds to the Switch Rx
203/348
The HSB protection is implemented in the ODU: one Transmitter is connected to the antenna (active),
the other transmitter is in standby.
The Criteria column provides information related to the event that triggered the last switch from the
corresponding channel. This is not an alarm. For instance, after startup this criteria may be set, iin
some cases, to Equipment Failure even if no such event actually happened.
4.14.1 Mux/Demux Protection Management

This protection is available for the 1 + 1 HSBMP, 1 + 1 HSBSDMP, and 1 + 1 FDMP configurations.
The Equipment Protection Management is performed by selecting MuxDemux Protection tree element.
The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in the EPS protection:
Schema Parameters
Channels Parameters
Figure 131 Mux/Demux Protection
4.14.1.1 Schema Parameters

The window Schema Parameters displays information about the protection.
The Schema parameters are:
Protection Type: this parameter is defined at configuration time and it is read only. The supported type
is: 1+1, e.g. a working channel (Main) is protected by a protecting channel (Spare).
Operation type: never revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied by clicking on Apply button.
204/348
4.14.1.2 Commands
To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.
Figure 132 Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Spare #0)
205/348
Figure 133 Mux/Demux Protection Switch (Main #1)
Using the Craft Terminal, you can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual
commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces Channel 1 into service independently of the
possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC (Abnormal Condition).
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Automatic Switch is the normal operation condition: the position of the switch depends on the commands
generated by the logic.
Manual has the lowest priority: it is performed only if there are no alarms that can activate an automatic switch.
It cannot be performed if Lockout or Forced commands are already activated. If this command is active, it will
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.
Command priority list
Command
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual
To release a previously activated command select None and click on Apply.
206/348
4.14.2 Radio Protection Management

This protection is available with all 1 + 1 configurations.
The Radio Protection Management is performed selecting Radio Protection element tree.
The following windows permit a complete view of all NE resources involved in a RPS protection:
Schema Parameters
Switching Threshold Parameters
Figure 134 Radio Protection View
4.14.2.1 Schema Parameter

The window Schema Parameters displays information about the protection.
The Schema Parameters are:
Protection Type field: shows the protection schema architecture: 1+1;
Operation Type field: always indicates notRevertive while actually automatic radio protection always
tries to give priority to the channel with the best reception quality.
207/348
4.14.2.2 Switching Thresholds

Protection switching thresholds are the alarm activation thresholds associated with radio protection switching
requests in a 1+1 configuration.
Figure 135 Radio Protection Switching Thresholds

Two kinds of thresholds can trigger the early switching request: received power level or error ratio.
Early Warning alarm. Early Switching Request (ESR):
Early warning on Rx Power Level: Defines the absolute received power level at which the Early
Warning alarm is triggered.
Early warning on BER: Defines the BER threshold at which the Early Warning alarm is triggered.
Low Bit Error Ratio. Switching Request (SR):
Defines the BER threshold at which the low Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.
High Bit Error Ratio. Priority Switching Request (PSR):
208/348
Selects the BER threshold at which the high Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered.
The selected error rate determines the AIS engagement.
4.14.2.3 Commands
To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element in the Tree view or on the Main #1 element.
Figure 136 Radio Protection Switch (Spare #0)
209/348
Figure 137 Radio Protection Switch (Main #1)

Using the Craft Terminal the operator can modify the state of the switch with the Lockout, Forced and Manual
commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation forces in service Channel 1 (default channel),
independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command forces in service
Channel 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC. Due to the fact that automatic
radio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual command is useless in this particular case.
Command priority list
Command
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual

Due to the fact that automatic radio protection always tries to work with the best channel, manual command
is useless in this particular case.
210/348
4.14.3 HSB Transmission Protection Management

This protection is available with all 1 + 1 HSB configurations.
The Transmission Protection Management is performed selecting Transmission Protection element tree.
The following windows permit a complete view of all Ne resource involved in a EPS protection:
Schema Parameters
Channels Parameters
Figure 138 Transmission Protection View
4.14.3.1 Schema Parameters

The window Schema Parameters displays the parameters that can be modify.
The Schema parameters are:
Protection Type: this parameter is defined at creation time and it is read only. The supported type are:
1+1,e.g. a working element is protected by one protecting unit.
Operation type: Shows the automatic restoration criteria from the protecting to the protected unit.
In the case of 1+1 HSBSD and 1+1 HSBSDMP cofigurations (space diversity: 2 antennas).
Operation type is not revertive (automatic restoration inhibited).
In case of 1+1 HSB and 1+1 HSBMP (1 antenna and 1 coupler): Operation Type is revertive
(automatic restoration allowed).
The operator choice for Operation Type will be applied clicking on Apply button.
211/348
4.14.3.2 Commands
To enter the Commands menu click on the Spare #0 element or on the Main #1 element in the Tree view.
Figure 139 Tx Protection Commands (Spare #0)
212/348
Figure 140 Tx Protection Commands (Main #1)

You can modify the state of the switch using the Lockout, Forced and Manual commands.
Lockout has higher priority than Forced: the activation connects to the antenna Transmitter 1 (default
transmitter), independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
Forced has higher priority than the automatic operation: the activation of this command connects to the antenna
Transmitter 0, independently of the possible active alarms. This command activates signaling AC.
be removed by an incoming alarm. This command does not activate signaling AC.
Command Priority List
Command
Priority
Lockout
Forced
Automatic switch
Manual
213/348
4.15
LOOPBACKS
The functions described in this section allow to perform the test operations.
Resource Tree Area: displays the object on which the loopbacks can be performed, sorted by number.
Resource Filter Area: display the possible filters to apply to loopback search.
Resource List Area: displays tabular information about the loopback supported by the resource
selected in tree area.
Resource Detail Area: displays, through tabbed windows, the properties done in list area. This area
enable to perform the available functions for involved resource.
4.15.1 Available Loopbacks

The loopbacks can be activated on the local NE only.
4.15.1.1 1+0 Radio Loopbacks
CT
IDU
ODU
2
TRIB
MUX/
DEMUX
ODU
IDU
MODEM
RF
RF
MODEM
MUX/
DEMUX
TRIB
Figure 141 1+0 available loopbacks
214/348
Figure 142 Channel 1 Loopback View (1+0)

In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.
In this area the following information is given:
Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)
Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.
Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End)
Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)
Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)
Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)
215/348
Figure 143 gives the relationship of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of the
equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.
IDU
CABLE
ODU
CABLE
4 Radio
port
(RF loop)
E1/E3 Port # xx
Figure 143 1+0 Loopback types
Clicking on a L square in the Summary block iagram view alllows you to navigate directly to the loopabck
configuration screen.
Tab. 1. 1+0 Radio loopbacks
No.
Loopback
name
CT selection in
the Resource
Tree Area
Ref. to
Fig.
Location
Loopback
type
Note
E1/E3
Port#xx
Channel 1
143
Near End
Internal
Loopback in the remote

station at tributary level
IDU cable
Channel 1
143
Near End
Internal
Loopback at the IDU output

at aggregate level
ODU cable
Channel 1
143
Near End
Internal
Loopback at the ODU input

at aggregate level
Radio port
Channel 1
143
Near End
Internal
RF local loopback
216/348
4.15.1.2 1+1 Radio Loopbacks
Figure 144 Channel 1 Loopback View (1+1)

In the Resource List Area are listed all the loopbacks which can be performed.
In this area the following information is given:
Channel: the number of the channel (channel 1 only)
Type Interface: the type of interface in which a loopback can be performed.
Location: the station in which the loopback is performed (Near End/Far End)
Type: the type of the loopback (Internal/External Line/External Line RF)
Modality: the type of the loopback (Loop and Continue only)
Activation: the activation status of a loopback (Active/Not Active)
In Figure 145 is given the association of all the possible loopbacks and their positions in the block diagram of
the equipment provided by the Summary Block Diagram View option, available in the Diagnosis menu.
217/348
IDU
CABLE
ODU
CABLE
4
Radio port
(RF loop)
E1/E3
Port # xx
Figure 145 1+1 Loopback types
Tab. 2. 1+1 Radio loopbacks

No.
Loopback
name
CT selection in
the Resource
Tree Area
Ref. to
Fig.
Location
Loopback
type
Note
E1/E3
Port#xx
Channel 0 or 1
145
Near End
Internal
Loopback in the remote

station at tributary level
IDU cable
Channel 0 or 1
145
Near End
Internal
Loopback at the IDU output

at aggregate level
ODU cable
Channel 0 or 1
145
Near End
Internal
Loopback at the ODU input

at aggregate level
Radio port
Channel 0 or 1
145
Near End
Internal
RF local loopback
218/348
4.15.2 How to activate a loopback

To activate a loopback:
Select the suitable loopback to be activated by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area
or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
The following screen will appear:
Figure 146 Loopback activation
Select Active in the Activation field.
Click on Apply.
In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from Not
Active to Active.
219/348
4.15.3 How to remove a loopback

To remove a loopback:
Select the suitable loopback to remove by clicking on the relevant object in the Resource Tree Area
or by selecting the relevant row in the Resource List Area.
The following screen will appear:
Figure 147 Loopback deactivation
Select Not Active in the Activation field.
Click on Apply.
In the row in the Resource List Area the Activation field of the relevant loopback changes from Active
to Not Active.
220/348
4.16
DIAGNOSIS
In the Diagnosis menu, six options are available as shown here:
Figure 148 Diagnosis menu
4.16.1 Alarms
In the diagnosis pulldown menu, select the Alarms/NE Alarms options. This opens the Alarm Surveillance (AS)
application, allowing managment of the NE alarms.
Figure 149 NE Alarms Synthesis
221/348
Figure 150 NE Alarms details

These are the alarms stored in the CT since its last connection to the NE.
4.16.2 Log Browsing

In the Diagnosis pulldown menu, select the Log Browsing option.
The proposed options:
Select the Alarm Log option to access the Alarm Log file.
The Alarm Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the alarms stored in the NE.
Refer to the 1320 CT Operators Handbook (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).
Figure 151 Alarm Log Windows
222/348
Select the Event Log option to access the Event Log file.
The Event Log windows opens, permitting to analyze all the events stored in the NE.
Refer to the 1320 CT Operators Handbook (Alcatel Ref. 3AL79552AAAA).
Figure 152 Event Log Windows
4.16.3 Remote Inventory

This screen is a readonly screen, which shows all the information on the equipment.
Figure 153 Remote Inventory Windows
223/348
4.16.4 Abnormal Condition List

The Abnormal Condition List option in the Diagnosis menu displays all the abnormal conditions (i.e. the
manual operations) currently active in the NE.
Figure 154 Abnormal Condition List Windows

The abnormal conditions can be:
Switch commands Forced or Lockout
Loopbacks
Tx muting (manual or automatic)
224/348
4.16.5 Summary Block Diagram View

The Summary Block Diagram View of the Diagnosis menu displays a global logical view (strictly related
to the physical implementation) highlighting a synthesis of all the alarms and statuses present in the system
(ODU+IDU).
This window also shows a logical view of the signal flowing through the functional block and switches.
Line (and arrow) trace changes in compliance with the current switch status. By clicking on the objects of the
drawing shown in the figure the operator can navigate to the specific view to perform maintenance operation
(for example specific alarm details, equipment details, manual switches, loopback (L), performance monitoring
(P).
The Summary Block Diagram View depends on the configuration.
As an example, the following configurations are shown here:
1 + 0 (see Figure 155 page 226)
1 + 1 HSB with mux/demux protection (see Figure 156, page 227)
1 + 1 Frequency Diversity (see Figure 157, page 228)
In detail, it is possible to:

navigate from Alarm indicator to related Alarm Synthesis;
navigate from External Point indicator to External Point view;
navigate from Switch indicator to related Protection Scheme view;
navigate from Loopback indicator to specific Loopback view; for example, by clicking on (L)
indicator of main board (Ch#1) the operator can navigate to loopback view for IDU cable;
navigate from Performance indicator to specific Performance view; for example, by clicking on (P)
indicator (line side) the operator can navigate to Current Data view;
navigate from ODU box to the radio view with automatic selection of the related channel.
To refresh the screen press the Refresh button.

Loopback indicator: yellow letter L means active loop.
Performance indicator: yellow letter P means active performance.
In the 1+1 configuration the current position of the switches is also shown.
225/348
Figure 155 Summary Block Diagram View: 1+0
226/348
Figure 156 Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 HSB with Mux/Demux protection
227/348
Figure 157 Summary Block Diagram View: 1+1 Frequency Diversity

By pressing the Refresh button the refresh of the screen takes place (active loopback and performance and
position of the switch).
4.16.6 Current Configuration View

This screen is a readonly screen, which shows the current configuration of the NE.
228/348
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
4.17
This chapter describes the functions to provide Performance Monitoring (PM) management. It explains the
procedures that the operator must perform in order to activate a PM process.
CAUTION:
With the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.
4.17.1 General information on the performance monitoring process

The performance monitoring (PM) gives indication on the quality of the service.
Quality of service PM is performed in accordance with G.826 and G.784.
It is assumed that the quality of the single tributary (E1, E3) can be derived from the quality of the aggregate
signal, therefore no dedicated quality of service PM is foreseen on the single tributaries.
Considering one section (see below), one current register is for 15 min and one for 24 h; 96 history registers
are available for 15 min and 8 for 24 h.
The radio section monitored is:
Radio Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section;
PROPR.
FRAMING
FEC
ENCODE
MODEM
RF
MODEM
RF
FEC
DECODE
PROPR.
FRAMING
Radio Hop
Figure 158 Radio section
The counters supported are the following:
Errored Seconds
Severly Errored Seconds
Background Block Error
Unavailable Seconds
The following table provides, for each frame structure, the main features useful to define a SES.
Tab. 3. SES Thresholds
Gross bit rate

[MHz]
G.826 Block size
Blocks per sec.
SES Threshold
(Note 1)
E3
16E1
8E1
4E1
4E1 +
2E1
39,498
39,498
19,748
9,874
4,537
4937
4937
4937
4937
4937
1481
1481
1481
1481
1481
(Note 1)
Note that according to ITUT G.826 a second is
declared a Severely Errored Second if it is a period of one second with
more than 30 % errored blocks or at least one defect.
229/348
The flow chart shown below illustrates the recognition of anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES
according to ITUT G.826 (12/2002).
Monitored
second
Yes
Defects?
No
No
Anomalies?
Yes
%EB 30?
ES
(but not a SES)
Yes
SES
(and therefore an ES)
No
Path in
available
State?
No
Yes
cES = cES + 1
cBBE = cBBE + EB(s)
Path in
available
State?
No
Yes
cES = cES + 1
cSES = cSES + 1
T131379098
End
Figure 159 Anomalies, defects, errored blocks, ES and SES according to ITUT G.826
230/348
4.17.2 Performance menu

The performance view allows the user to activate and monitor the PM process on the selected object.
Resource Tree Area: displays the threshold for measurement and the object monitoring sorted by
channel number.
Resource List Area: displays the PM management for the selected resource in the tree area.
Figure 160 Performance View

The performance reports can be of 2 different types:
15 minutes
24 hours
The following description explains the functions to provide the PM process with a granularity period of 15 min.
The same functions are provided for 24h PM process.
The PM are only of HOP type. The current report can be seen (and configured) and the history PM log can be
seen.
To see and configure the current report:
Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)
Click on HOP
Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)
231/348
Click on CD (Current Data).
To see a history log:

Click on the channel (0 or 1) (in 1+0 configuration channel 1 only)
Click on HOP
Click on the desired granularity (15 m or 24 h)
Click on the desired HD (History Data).
Each PM is associated with a threshold table. To see which threshold table is used click on HOP in the Resourse
Tree Area. The following screen will appear:
Figure 161 PM Alarm Profile Assignment Screen

To associate an Alarm Profile click on the selection box and select one of the Alarm Profiles available.
232/348
4.17.3 CD (Current Data)

The following winndow lets you start and to read the 15min PM report and 24h PM report:
Figure 162 Current Data View

4.17.3.1 CD parameters
The fields displayed in the upper part of the Current Data View let the operator check and manage the
parameters of the current data collection.
Suspect interval shows whether the current data are suspect or not.
Elapsed Time field (readonly) displays the elapsed time in the current interval of monitoring.
End Period: displays time of the PM in the graphical description and in the tabular description in the
upper part of the screen. By pressing the Refresh button this time changes.
Max Interval supp.: max. number of intervals (reports) which can be suppressed in the History
because they dont have errors.
Num. Interval supp.: number of intervals (reports) suppressed in the History because they dont
have errors.
4.17.3.2 CD Counters
The fields and buttons displayed in the lower part of the Current Data View screen (Counters Area) allow
management of performance events.
233/348
In the left part of Counters Area, there is a graphical description of the event counter value: BBE (Errored block),
ES (Errored second), SES (Severely Errored Second), UAS (Unavailable second).
These values refer to the last refresh performed by pressing the Refresh button.
In the right part of screen, there are button choices to perform actions on the current data collection:
Reset button resets the data collection and related counters.
Start button starts the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been stopped.
Refresh button makes a refresh of the counters.
Stop button stops the counters for the data collection, when the CD has been started.
4.17.4 HD (History Data)

The PM process monitors the parameters during a specified interval (i.e. 15min) and stores their values in
history data. A History Data collection is created automatically at the end of each time interval of Current Data
and deleted when the relative CD is deleted.
4.17.4.1 HD Parameters
The table displayed on the following window collects the history data for a related PM report:
Figure 163 History Data

The table columns hold the value of following parameters:
End Period: End period of the relevant report
Elapsed time: elapsed time in the related interval
Suspect interval: this field describes whether the History Data is suspect or not.
Counters: the last columns hold the counters value (BBE, ES, SES, UAS).
234/348
4.17.5 Threshold Data

This section describes how to see or change the threshold values assigned to PM counters.
To view the available threshold for PM process, the operator must select the Thresholds Tables node tree
in the Resource Tree Area of the Performance View.
By clicking on the threshold table on the view area the parameters of the 2 tables will appear:
Figure 164 Thresholds Tables

By clicking on threshold 1 or 2 in the Resourse List Area the Thresholds Table Configuration screen will appear.
In the upper part of the screen, the Name field displays the name assigned to the threshold table.
In the lower part of the screen, the low and high threshold for each counter is shown. To change them, the
operator must enter the new values in the table fields and click on the Apply button.
235/348
Figure 165 Threshold table configuration
236/348
4.18
Software Download
4.18.1 Server Access Configuration

An FTP server can be used to speed up the software download to the NE .
This menu allows to configure an FTP server on which the previously loaded software will be downloaded.
Copy the ECT directory present in the software CD on the FTP server.
Figure 166 Server access configuration screen

User Id and Password are the login information to access the FTP server.
In the Address field write the IP address of the FTP server.
In the Port field write the port to be used and in the Root Directory field write the FTP server directory name
from which the software can be downloaded.
By clicking on the Use System Default button, the server access values will be filled in automatically with the
default configuration.
The CT is the default FTP server with the following parameters:
User Id: ftp
Password: ftp
Address: IP address of the F interface or IP address of the Ethernet interface, if present.
Port: 15000
The System Default can be changed by writing different values in the fields and then by clicking on button OK.
237/348
4.18.2 Init SW Download

Using this menu, software is downloaded to the NE in order to upgrade the NE software version.
To start a download, select the desired software version and click on the Init download button.
This screen displays the software packages previously stored through the menu Supervision > Files
Administration > Software Administration available in the NES menu.
The Forced check box can be used to force download (i.e. the complete description file is downloaded to the
NE).
If the Forced download is not selected, the system will compare the software to be downloaded with the software
present in the NE, and will proceed with the download operation only if the versions are different.
Figure 167 Init Software Download screen

After selecting the software package to be downloaded and clicking on the Init download button, the following
confirmation dialog box is displayed:
238/348
Figure 168 Init SW Download confirmation dialog

Clicking Yes starts the actual download operation.
When the SW download starts, a screen showing the in progress operation of the download appears. Download
is aborted when the Abort button is pressed.
Figure 169 SW Download progress window
239/348
4.18.3 SW Status
This menu allows to display the information of the software installed in the NE.
The following information is displayed:
Name: software name
Version: software version
Operational state: enabled or disabled
Current status: committed or standby
By clicking on the Software Units Status button the SW Status screen, giving additional information on the
software package.
Figure 170 SW Status screen
240/348
The following information is displayed on the screen:

EC: software on the Equipment Controller
Figure 171 SW Unit Status screen

The Flash card, which stores the NE software, contains 2 banks.
The 2 banks can store 2 different software versions. One bank will be committed (active) and the other bank
will be standby.
The second bank will appear when a new software package has been downloaded the first time.
During download, the download file is automatically stored in the standby bank.
To activate the new version, first check the operational status of the standby bank. If the status is enabled (this
means that download took place without errors) select Activation or Forced Activation in the Software
Management Action field and click on the Apply Action button.
By selecting Forced Activation, the bank to be activated is forced to restart.
By selecting Activation, the bank to be activated restarts only if the content of the two banks differ.
241/348
5 Commissioning
A very precise knowledge of the link configuration is absolutely vital before you
begin commissioning. For this, complete the sheets for stations A and B according to the model supplied in Appendix 2.
STOP
5.1
Order of commissioning for a link
The commissioning operations described below are for a link comprising a station A and a station B.
STATIONA
STATIONB
Network
Network
Figure 172 Relative positions of stations A and B

The stages are:
prepare the PC (see 4.1),
install station A and roughly point the antenna towards station B,
commission station A,
install station B and roughly point the antenna towards station A,
commission station B and point the antenna, connect the tributaries and the service channels,
return to station A to:
fine tune the pointing of the antenna,
carry out all the commissioning checks (switching to local supervision mode),
check out the link,
cancel the local supervision function,
connect the tributaries and engineering service channels.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
The following equipment is required for commissioning:
Multimeter.
Portable PC running the supervisory software (see 4.1).
PC-NE link cable and F interface adapter cable, supplied with the system CDROMs.
A service kit (for measuring AGC and the telephone link between the IDU and the ODU).
A 2 Mbit/s or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer, with an impedance of 75 or 120 , depending on the configuration
of the link to be installed.
A compass and a pair of binoculars.
Tools as defined in 3.3.3.
243/348
5.2
Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1)
5.2.1 Preliminary operations

Main IDU (classic IDU)
Extension IDU (classic IDU)
Light IDU
Figure 173 Installing and Commissioning: IDU Controls and connectors
Install station A according to the instructions in section 3, and in particular those in 3.5.3.4 or 3.5.4.4
describing how to roughly point the antenna of station A towards station B.
Check that the correct power supply voltage is present (24 or 48 V), with the correct polarity, on the
power supply outlet.
Make a visual inspection for subrack installation and cabling:

the subrack allocation (or wall/table installation) according to the station layout.
the IDU rack and subrack ground connections.
the ODU ground connections.
there are no cables connected to any NMS port. Any that are connected must be disconnected.
in the case of a nonintegrated antenna, the antenna and the ODU must be grounded.
the IDU/ODU interconnection cable is disconnected from IDU.
NOTE: Make sure that the IDUODU cable connection is removed in order to verify via the CT the
System Tx Power and Frequency settings before powering up the ODU.
In the case of a configuration with classic IDU, check that a software features key enabling the
configuration is connected to the SKU/MTN connector (refer to 3.2, Comments on the information
marked on the software key label).
244/348
5.2.2 Powering up the IDU

NOTE: Since the IDUODU cable connection has NOT been established powering up the IDU, the ODU
will not be operating. Therefore, the IDU will display the relative alarms.
Power up the IDU(s) (via switch on the connector panel):
The green LED should come on.
Connect the PC to the equipment using the interface cable and F adapter cable supplied (serial port
connector marked F on the IDU
).
Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing out of sync on the main IDU. The LED flashing
occurs if IDU and ODU have never been configured together (otherwise, refer to 4). Download the
IDU configuration, by pushing switch to the IDU setting (IDU configuration taken as a reference).
After two minutes at most (for the configuration to be registered), the LEDs should stop flashing
simultaneously.
5.2.3 Configuring the IDU
Run LUX50 1320 CT software on the PC. Once connected to the IDU, the IDU configuration can be
done by running the Quick Configuration procedure (refer to section 4.8.5 on page 160).
5.2.4 Checking out operation

The checking out operation entails setting up local and remote loopback configurations as defined in section 2.5.
5.2.4.1 Checking operation in a 1+0 configuration
1
Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.
From the CT, select the Loopback tab, and click on the IDU Cable in the tree on the left. Select
Active and click on Apply to activate the IDU baseband loop.
Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the wiring, that the LAU and
LIU boards of the unit match (and their impedances) and the configuration of the equipment. If everything is OK, change the IDU.
Cancel the IDU baseband loop. Select Not Active and click on Apply button.
Set up the ODU cable loop.
Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the state of the IDU/ODU link
coaxial cable.
Cancel the ODU cable loop.
Set up the RF loop (if this option is available in the equipment).
Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking via operation 10; otherwise, check the radio
configurations and correct the configuration errors.
10
Cancel the RF loop.
11
Check that there are no remote controls still active (the AC indicator on the right should be green).
12
From the CT, select the Radio tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree should
appear in green.
13
If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value is found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.
14
Disconnect the BER analyzer.
245/348
5.2.4.2 Checking out operation in a 1+1 configuration

1
Connect the 2 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary.
From the CT, click on the Protection Schemes tab. For each protection (depending on the
configuration, protections can be: Radio Protection, HSB Tx Protection, Mux/Demux
Protection), select the Spare#0 node in the tree, and then select Lockout + Apply in order to
force operations on channel 1.
On channel 1, carry out operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1.
On channel 0, carry out operations in 5 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a basic 1+1 HSB configuration,
operations 2 to 11 in section 5.2.4.1 for a 1+1 HSB configuration with multiplexer protection.
Cancel forcing on channel 0 via the remote controls Command: None + Apply on Main#1 for
each protection.
Check that there are no remote controls still active (the AC indicator on the right should be green).
From the CT, select the Radio tab. The light in front of the Radio node in the Radio tree should
appear in green.
If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value found, refer to section 6 and correct as required.
Disconnect the BER analyzer.
246/348
5.3
Installing and commissioning station B
5.3.1 Preliminary operations
Commission station B by carrying out the same operations as those described for station A in
5.2.1 to 5.2.4, apart from the RF loop operations.
5.3.2 Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+1 (9400UXI101)

Ground connection
Rough elevation locking

screw
6
Elevation locking screw
Elevation
turnbuckle
Rough Azimuthal
locking screw
Azimuthal locking
screw (x4)
Azimuthal turnbuckle
Window of the pole mounting
Figure 174 Pole mounting 1+1 adjustments (9400UXI101)
Attach the hook of the service kit (ref. 9400UXT102) in the window of the Pole mounting.
Connect connector P01 (see Appendix 4) to the MAINT port on the front panel of the ODU.
Check the tightness of the two rough pointing screws and , tighten with a 5 mm Allen key.
Connect the voltmeter, set to DC range, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 of
the service kit 3EJ04113AAAA113. With the two turnbuckles, fine tune the azimuthal and elevation
settings (Figure 174) to obtain a maximum voltage on the voltmeter (AGC DC voltage of between 0 and
5 V).
Retighten the two azimuthal locking screws using the box wrench.
Tighten the four front elevation screws using the 5 mm Allen key (tighten in crisscross fashion).
Finish the operation by tightening the azimuthal and elevation turnbuckle lock nuts with the 16 mm flat
wrench.
CAUTION: For the tightening torques of the screws, refer to chapter 3.3.4.
247/348
5.3.3 Pointing the antenna with pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)

4 screws azimuthal tightening
2
Elevation turnbuckle
1
3 screws elevation tightening
Grounding connection
Azimuthal turnbuckle
Figure 175 Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102)

Connect connector P01 of the service kit (see Appendix 4) to the MAINT port on the front panel of
the ODU.
Connect the voltmeter, set to DC Volts, to P02/P03 of the service kit 9400UXT102 or to P02/P03 of
the service kit 3EG04113.
Be sure that the three screws and the four screws are a bit slackened, just enough to allow
movement of the different parts of the pole mounting. These screws must not be too much slackened,
otherwise, the finetuning of alignment will be imperfect. Use the 8 mm Allen key.
With the two turnbuckles and the 16 mm flat wrench, fine tune the elevation and azimuthal settings until
you obtain the maximum voltage reading in the voltmeter.
Tighten the three screws and the four screws
with torque 3 mdaN.
Note: Fine pointing of the antenna is described in 5.3.2.
5.3.4 Checking out operation
Using the local loop configurations (apart from the RF loop), repeat the operations carried out on station
A (see 5.2).
From the CT, run the Power Measures application (Radio tab, then the Power Meas tab).
Check that the received power level is greater than 90 dBm. This check must be carried out on the
normal channel and, if appropriate, the standby channel.
If the received power is less than this value, the reason is probably an antenna coarse pointing problem
or a transmission problem in station A.
Connect the tributary, supervision and ESC cables previously disconnected.
If an operator is available in another station of the network and there is a telephone in station B, test
the telephone ESC (general call using number 00).
Test the ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 connections, if applicable, and if the corresponding equipment is
installed in the station.
248/348
5.4
Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2)
5.4.1 Pointing the antenna
Adjust the orientation of the antenna in the same way as for station B (see 5.3.2).
5.4.2 Checking the radio transmission parameters
Connect the CT to station A and check that there is no remaining equipment alarm (EQP alarm
synthesis indicator should be green).
Check that there is no remaining transmission alarm (TRS alarm synthesis indicator should be green).
If some transmission alarms remain, use the Radio and Line Interface tabs to investigate the cause
of the alarms and, if necessary, correct it.
Select Radio tab and then Power Meas tab in order to retrieve the received power level value. Write
down this value. This operation has to be performed on both radio channels (Channel#1 or
Channel#0 in the Radio Channels tree).
Connect the CT to station B and repeat the same operations.
The received power levels should match the nominal received power indicated on the station configuration sheet
to within $6 dB. If the difference is greater:
Check that there are no abnormal propagation conditions (storm or heavy rainfall, for example).
In the case of a 1+1 HSB configuration with integrated coupler, use the Protection Schemes tab
on each station to check that the standby channel is not being used for reception and/or
transmission.
Check the pointing of the antennas (if necessary, pointing to a secondary lobe).
If the problem persists, contact the network administrator or Alcatel customer service.
If some transmission alarms remain (TRS alarm synthesis indicator), proceed as follows for the stations with
an alarm condition:
Connect the CT to the station.
Follow corrective maintenance operations as described in 6.2.3.
In case of configuration errors (tributaries incorrectly set to Unframed or Disabled, for example), use
the Line Interface and Radio tabs to make the necessary changes.
Be careful not to disconnect the link by setting the parameters incorrectly!
5.4.3 Remote tributary loop

A remote loop on an active tributary is needed for the checks described in 5.4.4 and 5.4.5.
Select the Loopback tab from CT connected to station B.
Set up the remote loop configuration as follows:
Select the E1/E3 port#xx (xx : the number of the tributary on which the loop is set up).
Select Active in the Activation panel and click Apply.
In station A, connect the BER analyzer to the port of tributary x and check that there are no errors.
249/348
5.4.4 Checking the transmit/receive switching function

These checks need to be carried out only in 1+1 FD and 1+1 HSB configurations.
Set up the remote loop on an active tributary.
Select the Protection Schemes tab from the CT for both station A and station B.
In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby channel as described below.
5.4.4.1 1+1 configuration
PROTECTION
HSB Tx
Protection
CHANNEL
Main#1
Radio Protection Main#1
1+1 FD CONFIGURATIONS
1+1 HSB CONFIGURATIONS

Command Forced + Apply
Check that the switchover is completed (see the graphic representation for stations A and B using the
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu.
NOTE: Receive mode switchovers must be executed without errors.

In 1+1 FD configurations, there is no transmit switching.
In 1+1 HSB configurations, transmit switching causes transient dropouts on the link and a loss of
received data indicated by a burst of errors.
In both stations, initiate a switchover to the normal channel as described below:
PROTECTION
HSB Tx
Protection
CHANNEL
Spare#0
Radio Protection Spare#0

Command Lockout + Apply
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu. The above note still applies.
Reinstate automatic switching mode by cancelling the remote controls previously activated as
described below:
PROTECTION
HSB Tx
Protection
CHANNEL
Spare#0
Radio Protection Spare#0

Command None + Apply
5.4.4.2 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection

In both stations, force operation to the normal multiplexer/demultiplexer as described below:
PROTECTION
CHANNEL
1+1 MP CONFIGURATIONS
MUX/DEMUX
Spare#0
P t ti
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu).
MUX switchovers cause a microinterruption of the link which results in the appearance of error bursts.
Check that there are no errors (after traffic has stabilized on the normal MUX).
In both stations, initiate a switchover to the standby multiplexer as described below:
PROTECTION
MUX/DEMUX
P t ti
Protection
250/348
CHANNEL
Spare#0
Main#1
Diagnosis/Summary Block Diagram View menu).
Check that there are no errors.
Reinstate the automatic switching mode by sending the remote control:
PROTECTION
MUX/DEMUX
Protection
CHANNEL
Main#1
5.4.5 Checking quality
Select the Performance tab on the CT(see 4.17.2). This application keeps a counter (errored
seconds, severely errored seconds, background block errors and unavailable seconds) on the hop
(results given for each hop and link).
Duration and results:

Application running time: 2 hours.
Tolerance: the readings must be less than or equal to those given in the table below:
AGGREGATE BIT RATE
EVENT
4 Mbit/s
8 Mbit/s
16 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s
ES
SES
UAS
BBE
NOTE:
If fading is observed over a period of less than 15 minutes, the fading period is not taken into account.
If fading is observed over a period of longer than 15 minutes, the test will be extended as required.
5.4.6 End of commissioning

To terminate the commissioning process:
Cancel the remote loop as follows:
Select the Loopback tab from CT connected to station B.
In the tree, select the E1/E3 Port#x entry corresponding to the tributary which is looped back.
Select Not Active in the Activation panel and click Apply.

Set different link identity codes for the transmit and receive directions
Reconnect the tributary, monitoring and ESC cables previously disconnected.
Check that there are no remote controls still active (AC indicator on the CT should be green).
251/348
252/348
6 Operation, servicing and maintenance

6.1
Preventive maintenance
This kind of maintenance is performed when carrying out a corrective maintenance procedure, or on a routine
visit to all the equipment of the station. It involves inspecting the units and their interconnections (connectors,
cables, sockets, etc), as well as all the equipment involved in the operation of the station (power supply,
batteries, solar panels, earthing, etc) and, in case of doubt, checking the suspect parts, taking all the necessary
precautions to avoid disrupting data transmission over the link (using the 1+1 switching capability if available,
etc). Preventive maintenance is recommended for the following units:
MCU board battery:
every 7 to 10 years (see 7.15.1).
Fan unit:
every 2 to 3 years or in case of alarm.

The system uses 2 fans. An alarm occurs when one fan fails. Both fans should be changed at the
same time (see 7.15.2).
If a main IDU 3CC0897xxxxB and an extension 3CC08920xxxB are used in accordance with chapter 3.4.2.2
recommendations (1U separation) this preventive maintenance could be forgotten.
6.2
Corrective maintenance
6.2.1 Methodology
Check the condition of the cables, connectors and connections, and of all the components that are
involved in the operation at the station (power supply, battery, earthing, etc),
Analyze the IDU alarm indicators,
If alarms are indicated, locate them using the Craft Terminal alarm indicators and analyze them and
carry out the necessary corrective procedures (change of unit, module, cable, etc).
6.2.2 Analyzing IDU alarm indicators

The alarm indicators on the IDUs provide an indication of the network elements that are affected by alarms:
Besides the information given below (classic IDU and Light IDU indications), the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs
can flash in a particular way to indicate equipment status information, as explained below:
URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing in sequence: change of configuration or software startup phase
(lasts about two minutes),
URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing simultaneously: the configurations of the IDU and ODU do not
match. The equipment is waiting for the operator to operate the IDU/ODU-ACO switch.
Meaning of indications on the main IDU (classic):
Red LED
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
Green LED
URG
NURG
BZ
IDU
ODU
ON :
ON :
ON :
ON :
ON :
Service Affecting alarm indicated

Non-Service Affecting alarm indicated
Busy (telephone ESC busy)
No alarm on main IDU
No alarm on main outdoor unit
Meaning of indications on the Light IDU:

Red LED URG
Red LED NURG
Yellow LED MAN
Green LED IDU
Green LED ODU
ON :
ON :
ON :
ON :
ON :
Service Affecting alarm indicated

NonService Affecting alarm indicated
Active remote control signal present
No alarm on IDU equipment
No alarm on ODU equipment
253/348
Meaning of indications on the extension IDU (if installed):

Yellow LED
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
Green LED
MAN
T-IDU
T-IDU
TX-ODU
TX-ODU
RX-ODU
RX-ODU
IDU
Green LED ODU
ON : Remote control from the supervision function

ON : Traffic on extension multiplexer/demultiplexer
OFF : Traffic on main multiplexer/demultiplexer
ON : Transmit traffic on standby ODU
OFF : Transmit traffic on main ODU
ON : Receive traffic on standby ODU
OFF : Receive traffic on main ODU
ON : No alarm on extension IDU
ON : No alarm on standby ODU
Note: One green LED IDU / ODU OFF indicates an alarm on the equipment.
6.2.3 Corrective Servicing

In a 1+1 configuration with a Mux/Demux protection, it is the spare Mux/Demux that is
chosen by default at the start even if an alarm is present on this equipment. Then, you
must force the main Mux/Demux with the remote control, change the spare unit and go
back to automatic mode with the remote control.
With the analog cable interface, the G.826 counters are not correctly evaluated.
6.3
Changing IDU
6.3.1 Replacing like for like a Light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1)
Power down the Light IDU / main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the software
key).
Change the Light IDU / main IDU after checking that the characteristics match (number of inputs,
impedance, etc). The impedances of the IDU can be reconfigured in any case (see 7.2.2) and
configuration is not needed with IDU which reference ends with the C letter (3CC......C) provided cables
referenced by Alcatel are used.
Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.
Power up the IDU.
Wait for the URG, NUR and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously.
Configure the IDU from the ODU by setting the IDU/ODU switch to the ACO/ODU position. Wait about
two minutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LEDs should go off and the equipment LEDs
should turn green.
Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software application.
Update the stations installation form (see model in Appendix 2).
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the station
configuration (see section 5, Commissioning).
Note: In the case of a basic 1+1 configuration, power down the extension IDU.
6.3.2 Replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) and vice versa
254/348
The procedure for changing the equipment is the same as for like for like replacement, but, in some cases, the
ODU configuration may not be taken into account. Connect the 1320CT to the IDU. Run the
Configuration/Quick Config procedure in order to change the NE configuration from 1 + 0 to 1 + 0L or vice
versa.
6.3.3 Replacing like for like a main IDU with MUX protection
Force operation using the protection command Forced on Channel #1 for Mux/Demux protection,
and switchover to the multiplexer/demultiplexer on the extension IDUs SCU board.
Force transmission and reception to the standby ODU.
Power down the main IDU. Disconnect from the power source.
Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing (remember to remove the software
key from the main IDU). For IDU configured with a MUX protection without Access IDU, only disconnect
the part of the cables connected directly to the IDU.
Change the main IDU after checking that the specifications are the same (number of inputs, impedance,
etc).
Reconnect all the cables to the unit starting with the lower MAIN/EXT cable (60pin connector) taking
care not to damage the contacts and also the software key from the removed unit.
Power up the main IDU.
Wait for the URG, NUR and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously.
Send the ODUs configuration to the IDU by pushing immediately on the IDU/ODU switch to the
ACO/ODU position (the lower green LED must be lighted).
Warning: An error of handling at this moment, will result in a connection break with a
loss of traffic.
The flashing of the leds is limited to 1 minute. The switch has to be activated as soon as the
led starts flashing otherwise the IDU sends its configuration to the ODUs and breaks the
connection.
The alarm leds should turn off and the 2 green leds should light on the main IDU (this stage can take
around one minute according to the ODU type).
Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software, otherwise cut off forcing on the receiver
of the spare ODU.
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all of the station
configuration (see section 5, Commissioning).
6.3.4 Replacing like for like an extension IDU
Check that the transmit and receive multiplexers are switched to the main channel.
Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
Disconnect all the cables connected to the unit you are changing.
Change the unit after checking that the specifications are all the same (number of inputs, impedance,
etc).
Reconnect all the cables to the unit.
Power up the unit.
Check that the alarm LEDs are off.
Check that there are no alarms in the LUX50 1320CT software.
255/348
6.3.5 Note on IDU compatibility

It is possible for the two IDUs to have different but compatible configurations for use in the station. In such cases,
you must alter the stations configuration parameters through the LUX50 CT software.
256/348
6.4
Changing ODU
Only in the case of a 1+0 configuration.
If you are replacing a ODU UX 23 MHz/1008 MHz with a A9400 UX Flat ODU, make sure
that the new ODU is compatible with the operating frequency.
Switchoff the IDU connected to the ODU to be changed.
Disconnect the IDUODU cable.
Change the ODU after checking that the characteristics of the two ODUs are the same.
Reconnect the IDUODU cable.
Switchon the IDU.
In the case of a standby ODU, wait two minutes. The reconfiguration takes place automatically.
For a main ODU, wait for the URG, NUR and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously. Configure the
ODU from the IDU by pushing the IDU/ODU switch to the IDU position. Wait about two minutes for
the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LED should go off and the equipment LEDs should turn
green.
In the event of an error, particularly if the pushbutton is set to the wrong side, re-enter all the station
configurations (see section 5, Commissioning).
If you are replacing an 16 QAM UX ODU or an 13 or 15 GHz ODU with RTPC by a A9400UX flat ODU,
you must systematically upgrade the software feature key.
257/348
258/348
7 Changing configurations
Changes to the transmission network may entail upgrading the equipment configurations to satisfy new
requirements. The 9400 UX system is designed to support these changes simply by modifying the software
configuration, or by physically modifying the equipment and its configuration.
Before any change of configuration, disable all remote controls.
For any work on the boards (dismantling/reassembly, change of configuration), the
operator must wear a grounded wrist strap (for example, the 3M Disposable Wrist
Strap, reference 2209).THESE OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT ONLY BY
TECHNICIANS, AUTHORIZED BY ALCATEL.
Update the reference documents and the labels in accordance with the new
configuration.
Some of these operations may entail opening the IDU to change the hardware configuration ( 7.6 ). These
changes may lead to:
changing the IDU ( 6.3):
replacing like for like a light or classic IDU (1+0 or basic 1+1) ( 6.3.1),
replacing a Light IDU with a classic IDU (1+0 only) or vice versa ( 6.3.2),
replacing like for like a main IDU with multiplexer protection ( 6.7.3),
replacing like for like an extension IDU ( 6.3.4),
changing the ODU ( 6.4),
changing from a 4QAM to a 16QAM:
replace the 4QAM ODU with the 16QAM ODU ( 6.4),
changing the channel frequency ( 7.1) :
changing frequency within the same subband ( 7.1.1),
changing frequency within another subband or a different band ( 7.1.2),
changing the tributaries ( 7.2) :
enabling inactive tributaries ( 7.2.1),
changing the impedance of a tributary (classic IDU) 7.2.2,
changing the impedance of a tributary (Light IDU) 7.2.3,
changing the bit rate by software ( 7.2.4),
changing the bit rate by changing the LAU and LIU tributary boards ( 7.2.5),
changing the feature key ( 7.3),
supervision
changing the physical address of the NE ( 7.4),
upgrading the software ( 7.5),
telephone service channel ESC2 (if any) 7.7
inserting, deleting or changing the telephone number in a station ( 7.7.1),
hardware configuring service channel 2 ( 7.7.2),
259/348
service channels ESC 3, 4 and 5 ( 7.8)
configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension ( 7.8.1),
configuring service channels 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit ( 7.8.2),
adding an ESC extension IDU ( 7.8.3)
configuring the service channel and network ports of a Light IDU ( 7.9),
configuring remote indication loops ( 7.10),
main classic IDU ( 7.10.1),
light IDU ( 7.10.2),
changing redundancy configuration ( 7.11)
upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection ( 7.11.1),
upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without MUX protection ( 7.11.2),
upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection ( 7.11.3),
adding multiplexer protection to a 1+1 configuration ( 7.11.4),
changing transmitted power level ( 7.12),
changing the HSB coupler polarization ( 7.13).
changing SIMM memories board ( 7.14),
replacing the following ( 7.15),
MCU board battery ( 7.15.1),
IDU fan ( 7.15.2),
IDU fuses ( 7.15.3).
The presence of the

disconnecting the link.
260/348
symbol at the start of a procedure indicates that it will involve temporarily
7.1
Changing frequency
7.1.1 Changing frequency within the same sub-band
A change of frequency within the same sub-band does not entail moving to each station of the link. The change
of frequency on remote station (B) can be applied from local station (A) using the local supervision function, or
from the general supervision terminal.
The frequency of the remote station must always be modified before that of the local
station.
Update the information sheet needed to install the station (Appendix 2).
Open the CT on station B.
Select the Radio tab, then the Frequency tab.
For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on Apply
Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.
Open the CT on station A
Select the Radio tab, then the Frequency tab.
For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies (if authorized) and click on Apply.
Check that the duplex separation between the transmit and receive frequencies is correct.
Download the new configuration.
Close the application.
7.1.2 Changing frequency within another sub-band or a different band
Changing frequency in a different sub-band entails changing the ODU (one or two units according to the
configuration).
Changing frequency in another frequency band also entails changing the antennas and, if necessary, the HSB
coupler.
This means that, in both cases, changing the frequency entails going to each station. The configuration is
changed locally in each station by software.
The following procedures must be carried out on each station:
Power down the IDUs.
Adjust the outdoor part according to the new configuration (exchanging ODUs and, if necessary,
antennas and the HSB coupler), referring to section 3, Installation.
Repeat the commissioning procedures as described in section 5, in particular:
If there is a change of frequency band, make sure the correct ODU and duplexer are selected.
In all cases, adjust the Tx and Rx frequencies according to the new frequency band.
In a 1+1 HSB configuration, check that the transmit and receive frequencies of the two channels are
the same.
Check that there are no alarms.
261/348
7.2
Changing tributaries
7.2.1 Enabling inactive tributaries
From the CT, select the Line Interface tab.
Activate the required tributaries by changing their signal mode from Disabled to Unframed.
Check that there are no alarms on the newly activated tributaries.
7.2.2 Changing the tributary impedance (classic IDU)

7.2.2.1 Impedances according to the configuration
The tributaries ports are compatible with the G703 ITUT standard.
For the n x 2 Mbits tributaries type, the impedance can vary from 75 to 120 and reciprocally only by
configuration.
These different configurations can be carried out by:
configuration modification of the L.A.U. boards alone
connection of the cable 75 referenced 3CC07885ADAA for the 4 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectors
or referenced 3CC07885AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with 1.6 / 5.6 connectors or 3CC07759ADAA for the
4 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors or 3CC07759AEAA for the 8 x 2 Mbits with BNC connectors whereas
the IDU is forced in 120 .
configuration of the L.A.U. boards and the IDU port
automatic configuration when connecting the cables in 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatel
cables are used or that the cabling is respected as defined in Appendix 6.1.1.1.
These configuration possibilities are listed in the table in the chapter 7.2.2.2.
7.2.2.2 Configuration of the impedances according to the configuration
During the lifetime of a product, various versions of the material manufacturing are made and to ease the
explanation of configuration modifications of these various versions, we use the following acronyms (IDU ,
IDU ,CABLE , CABLE ).
262/348
DEFINITION
IDU
L.A.U boards
References of the main IDU
LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059AAxx
16X2 NUM 120: 3CC08971AAAx*

16X2 NUM 75: 3CC08971ABAx*
16X2 H.I 1+1 Full:
3CC08971ACAx*
References of the
extension IDU
EXT FULL 16X2:
3CC08974AAxx*
EXT 8X2: 3CC08975AAAx*
8X2 NUM: 3CC08972AAAx*

4X2 NUM: 3CC08973AAAx*
EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAx*
* x = A or B
IDU
L.A.U boards
References of the main IDU
References of the
extension IDU
LAU 8x2 Mbits/s: 3CC06059ACxx
16X2 NUM: 3CC08971AAAC


8X2: 3CC08975AAAC
EXT 4X2: 3CC08976AAAC
CABLE (see details 3.6.5)

Impedance
75
120
Reference
Connector
Mbits/s
3CC07885AAxx
1.6/5.6
4X2
3CC07885ABxx
1.6/5.6
8X2
3CC07759AAxx
BNC
4X2
3CC07759ABxx
BNC
8X2
3CC07658AAxx
distribution bar
8X2
CABLE
Reference
Connector
Mbits/s
3CC07885ADxx
1.6/5.6
4X2
3CC07885AExx
1.6/5.6
8X2
3CC07759ADxx
BNC
4X2
3CC07759AExx
BNC
8X2
263/348
GENERAL PRINCIPLE
In 1+0 or 1+1 configuration, the impedance modifications from 120 75 are made on the L.A.U. boards.
In 1+1 configuration with the multiplexer protection, the main IDU and the extension IDU are positioned in high
impedance and it is the IDU port that is configured in 75 or 120 .
In 34 Mbits (with only the IDU
indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
), the impedance modifications are made on the 3CC06061AAxx board as
In n X 2 Mbits/s with IDU , to modify the impedance from 120 75 or to get high impedance (HZ) the straps
have to be positioned on the 3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx as indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
In n X 2 Mbits/s with IDU , the impedance modifications are made automatically when connecting the cables
in 1+0 or in 1+1 provided that the codified Alcatel cables are used or that the cabling is respected as defined
in Appendix 6.1.1.1. It is only when using the 3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx board has to be configured
as indicated in chapter 7.2.2.4.
If the IDU is used, it is strongly recommended to change or to remain in automatic
position and it is only when using the cable that it is mandatory to change in
manual configuration.
7.2.2.3 Method
Power down the main IDU and, if necessary, the extension IDU. Disconnect them from the power
source.
Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channels between IDUs.
Open the IDUs concerned ( 7.6).
Set the strap on the LAU board or boards to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection setting as required.
Close the units.
Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channels to the IDUs.
Connect the IDUs to the power source. Power them up again.
264/348
7.2.2.4 LAU boards for main and extension IDUs

CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU BOARD
Port impedance levels:
34 Mbit/s tributaries must be set to the 75 ohms or protection setting, as indicated in figure 176,
Tributary positions
2Mbit/s auxiliary
34Mbit/s tributary
IN
34Mbit/s
OUT
34Mbit/s port on connector panel
Positions of impedance straps and ports on the 34 Mbit/s LAU board, 3CC06061AAxx
Impedance strap positions
34Mbit/s in 75 ohms
34Mbit/s in protection mode
Figure 176 Position of the straps in 34 Mbits/s
2Mbit/s in 75 ohms
symmetrical 2Mbit/s in 120 ohms
2Mbit/s in protection mode
Figure 177 Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbits/s
265/348
CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES OF THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAU BOARDS

3CC06059AAxx or 3CC06058AAxx
The tributary port impedances must be set to the 75 ohms, 120 ohms or protection settings, as indicated below:
Tributary positions
T101
Tributary N1/9
TB251
TB252
T201
Tributary N4
1
2
TB250
1 75
1
1 120
TB252
T251
T251
C450
T351
75
T401
111
TB452
Tributary N3/11
1
1
1
TB402
75
T401
3719
20 1
3719
Tributary N3
Tributary N2
Tributary N2/10
T450
T301
1
1
1
T451
120C400
12075
111
TB452
T450
TB402
TB400
TB352
12075
20
TB302
120C400
T400
TB401
C350TB400
TB451
B350
TB351T
TB301
Tributary N8/16
Tributary N5/13
C300
C450
T451
T400
TB401
TB300
T350
TB450
T300
TB451
T151
Tributary N4/12
TB450
TB202
T250
C250
TB251
1 75
1
1 120
C500
Tributary N1
J101
TB250
TB201
TB152
C100
T250
TB200C250
TB151
Tributary N7/15
Tributary N6/14
TB150C200
C150
T101
TB102
C500
T200
1
1
1 120
TB201
C100
TB101 75
J101
TB102
T150
T100
TB100
1 75
1
1 120
1
2
TB101
TB100
T100
P101
P101
3CC06059AAxx
3CC06058AAxx
Figure 178 Position of the tributaries on the boards
Strap positions
75ohms
120ohms
Protection with port
The 75ohm and 120ohm settings are marked on the PCB
Figure 179 Position of the straps in N x 2 Mbit/s
266/348
T102
C101
C101
T110
T111
T111
MX108
T115
T115
S101
CR101 CR102
10
1
ON
1
20
20
19
37
ON
MX109
19
37
10
T116
MX109
T116
S101
CR101 CR102
T112
MX107
T112
MX107
T114
J101
T108
MX108
T109
MX104
J101
MX104
T108
MX106
T107
MX105
T106
T113
T105
T105
MX103
T104
MX102
T103
T101
T102
1
T101
MX101
3CC06059ACxx or 3CC06058ABxx
MX101
P101
P101
3CC06059ACxx
3CC06058ABxx
Figure 180 Position of the tributaries on the board

S101
S101
ON
ON
ON
10
10
ON
ON
10
ON
Auto/Z
10
Auto/120
Hard
Std
10
Auto/Z
Auto/120
Hard
Std
Auto/Z
Auto/120
Hard
Std
10
Auto/Z
Auto/120
Hard
Std
10
S101
S101
ON
ON
HZ
Manual forcing 75 ohms, (for

information)
75
Soft
Spe
HZ
Manual forcing 120 ohms,

use of cable
75
Soft
Spe
HZ
75
Soft
Spe
HZ
75
Soft
Spe
Automatic position (recom

mended), standard factory
configuration with IDU
Manual forcing in protection

mode with port (for informa
tion)
Figure 181 Position of the switches

The white part of the above drawing indicates the switches position.
The automatic mode position covers all the cases of use of cable (or those respecting the cabling given in
appendix 6.1.1.1) and the 1+1 protected.
267/348
7.2.2.5 LAU combination boards in access IDUs

CONFIGURING THE 34 MBIT/S LAU COMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS
Set the straps for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s portion of the 34 Mbit/s bit rate on board 3CC07443AAxx
auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary port impedence must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Note: The impedance of the 34 Mbit/s tributary port must not be modified, it is set to 75 ohms.
34Mbit/s port on connector panel
R126
C103
R130R128
R131R127
OUT
20
1
1
20
1
20
34Mbit/s
R121
R124
J102
R125
R119
DH101
R129
MCL
J102
R132
R122
J103 R133
P102 J103
R123
P101
R110
R113
R114
R120
R104
19
37
19
37
T101
IN
3719
R103
1J101
2
R105
R107 C102 R106
R108
L101
R111
R117
R109
R118
R115
R116
R112
R102
R101
C101
120 75
Figure 182 Position of 2 Mbit/s impedance strap and tributary ports on board 3CC07443AAxx
268/348
P103
R228
C148
R226
20
R224
C144
P102
C142 R222
R198
R199
L113 TB137
R200
37
37
19
19
R220
R218
C140
R195
R193
L112 TB135
R196
R189
R185
R191
R187
L111 TB133
L110 TB129
R192
R188
R184
20
P101
20
1
C138
TB132
R190
R216
R186 TB130
R166
C125
TB127
C136
R145
L102 TB111
R146
37
37
19
R214
19
R183
C134
TB125
R182
R181
L109
R148
R147
L103 TB113
R149
R170
R168
C126
C127
20
1
C146
R206
R207
L115 TB143
R208
R203
R202
L114 TB141
R204
R176
C130
TB140
R174
TB138
C129
R197
C128 R172
R194 TB136
R151
R150
L104 TB116
R152
R137
R201
R157
R156
L106 TB119
R158
R153
R154
L105 TB117
R155
TB105
T112
R209
R211
L116 TB146
R212
R180
TB148
C132
C131 R178
TB144
R205
R160
R159
L107 TB121
R161
R210
TB123
R164
R163
R162
L108
C116
R139 TB107
T115
C114
R138 TB106
T114
C113
C112
T113
T105
C104
TB108
C115
R140
T116
T108
C107
T107
C106
C111
R136 TB104
R135 TB103
TB110
T106
C105
TB102
R141
R142
L101 TB109
R143
R165C117
R133
TB126
TB112
R167C118 R144
C109
TB101 R134
TB128
T111
Tributary N5
R215C135
R119
R120
T110
Tributary N3
R217C137
C110
TB114
R169C119
R121
R122
R117
R118
T109
TB131
R107
R108
T104
TB115
R171C120
R123
R124
C103
TB134
R219 C139
R109
R110
R105
R106
T103
Tributary N1
Tributary N7
C133
TB118
R173C121
C102
TB139
R221C141
R125
R126
C101
Tributary N15
R213
TB120
R175C122
R111
R112
R103
R104
T102
TB142
R127
R128
R101
R102
T101
Tributary N13
R223 C143
TB122
R177C123
Tributary N8
TB145
R113
R114
Tributary N6
Tributary N11
R225C145
R129
R130
Tributary N4
R179C124
Tributary N2
TB147
Tributary N16
R227C147
R115
R116
Tributary N14
Tributary N9
3719
R131
R132
Tributary N12
TB124
Tributary N10
C108
CONFIGURING THE TRIBUTARIES ON THE N X 2 MBIT/S LAU COMBINATION BOARD IN ACCESS IDUS
positions of N x 2 Mbit/s tributaries on board 3CC06765AAxx
Figure 183 Position of the tributaries on the board
Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s on board 3CC06765AAxx
75ohms
120ohms
The 75ohms and 120ohms settings are marked on the PCB
Figure 184 Positions of straps for N x 2 Mbit/s on

board 3CC06765AAxx
On board 3CC06765AAxx, the impedances of the tributary ports must be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms.
269/348
7.2.3 Changing the tributary impedance (Light IDU versions only)

7.2.3.1 Methodology
Power down the Light IDU.

Disconnect it from the power source.
Note: For the Plugin IDU, extract it from the BTS.
Disconnect the tributary ports and engineering service channel from the IDU.
Open the IDU.
Set the switches to the 75 ohms or 120 ohms position as required.
Close the unit.
Reconnect the connectors of the tributaries and service channel to the IDU.
Connect the IDU to the power source.

Power up again.
Note: For the Plugin IDU, simply insert it in the BTS, it will power on automatically.
7.2.3.2 Configuring the n x 2 Mbit/s tributaries
ON
ON
10
S104
ON
S105
10
ON
S106
10
ON
T107
MX162
T106
T108
C139
K104
K105
CR125
CR123
CR122
S108
K103
CR124
K102
MX167
19
S109
MX168
20
1
P101
C142
MX164
J107
MX170
C148
37
19
37
C146
C147
C140
FL106
MX165
ON
C141 C143
C138
20
5
9
1
6
5
9
1
6
P102
MX166 CR119
R121
C149
FL105
MX159 L105L106
C136
C137
C134
C133
R119
R120
C132
C135
ON
S101MX161
T105
S107
10
R117
L107
S103
10
CR117
MX160
CR116
L108
L112
L109
L110
CR121
MX171
C150
CR126
R122
R123
S102
10
Y108
T104
CR127
J108
C151
DS102
C153
FL107
T103
R118
K101
CR118
10
T102
Y107
C144
C145
T101
C131
C130
C127
C152
CR115
C125 CR112 C126
C124 CR111
MX156
L111
C129
C128
S102 for channel 4,
6 1
9 5
S103 for channel 3,
CR120
MX163
S104 for channel 2,
MX169
MX157
The port impedance values of tributaries 1 to 4 can be set to 75 ohms or 120 ohms using switch modules:
S105 for channel 1
A101 A102
P103
Figure 185 Positions of switches on the MCU board
270/348
Each switch module has ten switches, as shown below.
Switches 5 to 10 are for choosing the 75 or 120 ohms impedance for the
channel concerned.
Switches 2, 3, 4 are for choosing the type of ground in 75 ohms
configuration.
The combination of settings of switches 1 on S104 and S105 can be used
to identify the type of engineering practice containing the SCU board: switch
1 of S102 and S103 is not used.
Figure 186 Locating and using the switches on the switch module
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
HDB3_IN_P
75 ohms with electrical ground
HDB3_IN_M
OFF
ON
75 ohms with ground isolated via

capacitor
120 ohms
TRANSFO
OFF
ground isolated via

capacitor
OFF
board electrical ground
OFF
ground isolated from board
OFF
ON
The position of switch 1 should not be altered (reserved for factory use)
75 ohms with ground isolated from the

board
Figure 187 Configuring the impedance of a tributary
7.2.3.3 Identifying the type of engineering practice
The combination of switches 1 on S104 and S105 can be used to identify the type of engineering practice
containing the MCU board. This setting is reserved for Alcatels use.
7.2.4 Changing bit rate by software
In the classic IDU version, choose, from the list of available bit rates, another bit rate offered by the software
feature keyLAU and LIU board combination (for example, change from a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration to an 8x2
Mbit/s configuration).
In the Light IDU versions, you can change from a 2x2 Mbit/s configuration to a 4x2 Mbit/s configuration (or vice
versa).
271/348
This operation can be performed only if the number of tributaries used is less than the number of tributaries
available on the equipment. If this condition is satisfied, you must also have a software feature key that
is compatible with the new bit rate. If not, you must first change the key as described previously in 7.3.
The bit rate of the remote station must always be modified before that of the local station.
Connect the CT to the station and select menu Configuration/System Settings.
Select the new value for Capacity, then click on Apply.
Close the System/Settings window.
Activate the new tributaries, if necessary, as described in 7.2.
7.2.5 Changing bit rate by changing an LAU and LIU tributary boards
These operations concern only classic IDUs.
7.2.5.1 Procedure
The case in which a change of bit rate does not involve changing the LAU and LIU boards is described in 7.2.
The table below summarizes the procedures according to the various changes of configuration.
UPGRADE
1+0 or 1+1
CONFIGURATIONS
MAIN IDU
4 inputs

8 inputs
8 inputs

16 inputs
n x 2 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s

n x 2 Mbit/s
(n p 4)
272/348
1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITH

MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION
MAIN/ EXT. IDU
ACCESS IDU (if present)
Change boards:
LAU:
Change boards:
LAU:
3CC06058xxx3CC06059xxx
LIU:
3CC05818AAxx3CC06026AAxx
and configuration of main IDU:

2Mbit/stributaries:75/120ohms
3CC06058xxx3CC06059xxx
LIU:
with configuration of main and

extension IDUs:
2Mbit/stributaries:protection
Add boards:
LAU:
Add boards:
LAU:
3CC06059Axxx
3CC06059Axxx
LIU:
LIU:
3CC06119AAxx
3CC06119AAxx
and main IDU configuration:

with configuration of main and

extension IDUs:
2Mbit/s tributaries: protection
Change boards:
LAU:3CC06061Axxx
LIU: 3CC06118AAxx
and main IDU configuration:
34Mbit/s:75ohms
Change boards:
LAU:3CC06061Axxx
LIU: 3CC06118AAxx
and configuration of main and
extension IDUs:
34Mbit/s: protection
Change boards:
LAU:
Change boards:
LAU:
3CC06061Axxx3CC06058Axxx
LIU:

2Mbit/stributaries: 75/120ohms
LIU:

extension IDUs:
2Mbit/stributaries: protection
Check the configuration of the new

port impedances (75 or 120ohms)
Check the configuration of the new

port impedances (75 or 120ohms)
Add link cables for tributaries1
to16 between the access IDU and
the main and extension IDUs
Change the LAU combination

board:
3CC07443Axxx
and configuration of access IDU:

34Mbit/s:75ohms

board:
and configuration of access IDU:

2Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120ohms
UPGRADE
1+0 or 1+1
CONFIGURATIONS
1+1 CONFIGURATIONS WITH

MULTIPLEXER PROTECTION
MAIN IDU
34 Mbit/s

n x 2 Mbit/s
(4 < n p 8)
34 Mbit/s

n x 2 Mbit/s
(n > 8)
MAIN/ EXT. IDU

Change boards:
LAU:
Change boards:
LAU:
LIU:

2Mbit/s tributaries: 75/120ohms
LIU:

extension IDUs:
2Mbit/s tributaries: protection
Change boards:
LAU:
Change boards:
LAU:
3CC06061Axxx
2x3CC06059Axxx
3CC06061Axxx
2x3CC06059Axxx

board
board:
and configuration of access IDU
LIU:
LIU:
3CC06118AAxx
3CC06026AAxx+3CC06119AAxx
and configuration of main IDU.
ACCESS IDU
3CC06118AAxx
3CC06026AAxx+3CC06119AAxx

extension IDUs.
273/348
7.2.5.2 Method
Update the information sheet need to install the station (Appendix 2).
If the new configuration requires a change of key, change it first (see 7.3).
Power down the IDUs, disconnect them from the power source and disconnect the tributary, service
channel and inter-unit cables.
Open the IDUs ( 7.6).
Disconnect the plug linking the power supply to the front panel.
On the front panel, using a 5 mm flat wrench, remove the spacers securing the LAU boards to be
replaced.
Raise and remove the LIU board (held on the lower circuit by two plugs).
Remove the LAU board (and for the 34 Mbit/s tributary, disconnect the two subclick plugs).
Remove the LAU board and the corresponding LIU board (linked by ribbon cable).
For changing from 16 x 2 Mbit/s to 34 Mbit/s, similarly remove the second LAU/LIU board level.
Install the new LAU and LIU boards after checking the impedance configurations.
For the 34 Mbit/s version, fit the small daughter board supporting the 1.6/5.6 connectors
(3CC07830AAxx), in place of the top I/O connector (9/16) or ACCESS connector (9/16), fit the daughter
board at the back of the connector panel and secure it by screwing the spacers to the outside of the
connector panel.
For the 34 Mbit/s version, remember to connect the two subclick plugs to the LAU board.
Close the IDUs again.
Reconnect the tributary, service channel, inter unit and power supply cables.
Power up the IDU.
Repeat the commissioning operations described in section 5, in particular, make sure the following
parameters are updated:
IDU Main Type
Capacity
Tributary status (Unframed or Disabled)
R121
LIU board position

(two boards stacked in
16x2Mbit/s config)
T102
LAU/LIU link
cable
T103
R106
R108
R109
R110
R103
J103
J105 R130
C105
3719
LAU board position

(two boards stacked in
16x2Mbit/s config)
J104
R104
R105
P101
1 R117
2
R118 R125
IN
OUT
T104
R134
R133R135
34Mbit/s
201
R123
R115
1
2
R124
R126
R127
R128
R129
R119
R120
R116
R122
J102
R111
R112
R113
PSU board
position
R107
R114
C103
R131
R132
Power supply
connection board
Figure 188 Indoor unit, positions of LAU and LIU boards and port wiring
274/348
7.3
Changing software feature key
Not applicable in the Light IDU versions.

When changing configuration (1+0, 1+1, etc) and bit rate, you may need to change the feature key if it does not
offer the requisite functionality. The procedure for changing the key is as follows:
7.4
Connect the CT to the IDU and make sure that the Equipment tab is selected (this is the default).
Remove the software feature key from the main IDU and check that the alarm Replaceable Unit
Missing appears on IDU/MAIN/SKU.
Fit the new key.
Wait for the software feature key alarm to disappear. The alarm will not disappear if the characteristics
of the key are incompatible with the configuration.
Changing a NEs IP Address and/or OSPF Area
7.4.1 From the station configured as a network element
With the CT connected to the NE, select the Configuration/Quick Configuration menu.
Navigate through the quick configuration steps and update the IP address and OSPF parameters.
Procdeed through the end the Quick Configuration and click Finish.
Close the CT.
Wait (about two minutes) for the NE to reset its management processor in order to apply the new IP
address to the NE.
Notify the network supervisor of the change of the NEs IP address.
275/348
7.5
Upgrading software (from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1)

On any change of onboard software in the equipment, consider updating the
installation form in Appendix 2 and, if necessary, notify Alcatel customer service.
7.5.1 Installing 946LUX50 1320CT
If not already done, install the 1320CT Craft Terminal software on the PC to be used as LUX50 Craft
Terminal, as described in section 4.1.
7.5.2 Upgrading from 946LUX12 to 946LUX50

946LUX50 software requires the main IDUs MCU board to be fitted with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4
Mbytes of RAM (see 7.14).
If the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50 does not comply with these requirements, IDU upgrade procedure
described in either 7.5.2.1 or 7.5.2.2 must be executed. Otherwise, procedure described in 7.5.2.3 can
be used instead.
For any of the above cases, procedure described in 7.5.2.4 needs to be executed afterwards in order to have
the NE networking parameters configured.
7.5.2.1 Replacing main IDU
Replace the LUX12 main IDU with a LUX50 main IDU, following the procedure described in 6.2. At
the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from ODU is automatically converted to
LUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.
Connect the LUX50 1320CT to the IDUs F interface using F interface adapter cable.
Configure the IDU network parameters as described in 7.5.2.4.
7.5.2.2 Replacing main IDU memories
Open the cover of the main IDU as instructed in 7.6.
Install the new memories (including LUX50 flash memory) as shown in figure 204, 7.14.
Close the main IDU cover, reversing the order of operations on opening.
Reconnect all the cables to the unit and the software key.
Power up the IDU.
Wait for the URG, NURG and ATT LEDs to start flashing simultaneously.
Configure the IDU from the IDU by setting the IDU/ODU switch to the IDU position. Wait about two
minutes for the terminal to be reconfigured. The alarm LEDs should go off and the equipment LEDs
should turn green. At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration coming from IDU is
automatically converted to LUX50 format, and applied to both IDU and ODU.
276/348
7.5.2.3 Downloading 946LUX50 software

Reminder: this procedure can only be used if the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50
is already set up with an 8 Mbytes flash memory and 4 Mbytes of RAM.
Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check the
IDU date.
Connect the LUX12 Craft Terminal to the LUX12 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.
Using Software downloading application (refer to 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade the
IDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX12 software
download application is available at the following location on LUX50 CDROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:
<CDROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin
At the end of the operation, the LUX12 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, and
applied to both IDU and ODU.
7.5.2.4 Configuring IP address, OSPF and NMS

Due to the fact that LUX12 network management relies on RQ2, while LUX50 uses SNMP, network parameters
need to be configured on a LUX50 IDU following a migration from LUX12.
Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in 4.3.3.
Configure the NE IP address (see 4.8.2.2).
Configure OSPF area (see 4.8.2.4).
Configure pointtopoint interfaces (see 4.8.2.5).

Do not use this procedure on IDUs manufactured prior to November 2000. Check the
IDU date.
Connect the LUX40 Craft Terminal to the LUX40 IDU to be upgraded to LUX50.
Using Software downloading application (refer to 4.6 in LUX12/LUX40 User Manual), upgrade the
IDU 360 software to LUX50. The LUX50 IDU 360 software file compatible with LUX40 software
download application is available at the following location on LUX50 CDROM Ref 3CC14311AxAA:
<CDROM Drive>:\V_N50\3CC07767.bin
At the end of the operation, the LUX40 configuration is automatically converted to LUX50 format, and
applied to both IDU and ODU.
Open 1320CT application and log on the NE as described in 4.3.3.
Follow indications provided in 4.4: Software download toward NE.
277/348
7.6
Opening an IDU
A classic IDU is opened as described in the photos in Figure 189 and the procedure below.
The procedure for opening a Light IDU is the same, except the step shown in photo , since this unit does not
have a Display panel.
Isolate the power supply and disconnect all the cables to the IDU.
Undo the side screws on the unit (screws securing the fixing brackets (Photo ) and the metal plates
concealing the fixing brackets mounting position on the operation panel).
Using a 5 mm flat wrench, undo the connector fixing nuts on the operation panel of the IDU
(Photo ).
Dismantling one of the fixing brackets
Dismantling the connector securing screws on the Operation panel

(This phase does not concern the Light IDU version)
Using a fixing bracket to release the cover
Opening the cover
Figure 189 Opening an IDU
Slide the cover away from the connector panel towards the operation panel using the fixing brackets
as a lever to disengage the cover from the connector panel (Photos and ).
To reassemble, proceed in the reverse order.
278/348
7.6.1 Indoor unit configuration

UNIT
Light IDU
(Classic)
Main IDU
CONFIGURATION
1+ 0
All configurations
ITEM
1 or 1
basic 1+1
Extension IDU
1+1 with multiplexer protection
Light MCU
PSU
MCU
LIU 4x2 Mbit/s

LIU 8x2 Mbit/s
LIU 34 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU
LAU 4x2 Mbit/s

LAU 8x2 Mbit/s
LAU 34 Mbit/s
16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU
PSU
ESC extension SCU
ESC daughter boards
PSU
ESC extension 1+1 SCU
ESC daughter boards
PSU
1+1 protection MUX SCU
ESC daughter boards:
4x2 Mbit/s LIU

8x2 Mbit/s LIU
34 Mbit/s LIU
16x2 Mbit/s extension LIU
5
6
7
Access IDU
1+1 with MUX protection
PSU
1+0 ESC extension
BOARDS
10
4x2 Mbit/s LAU

8x2 Mbit/s LAU
34 Mbit/s LAU
16x2 Mbit/s extension LAU
16x2 Mbit/s LAU combination
34 Mbit/s LAU combination
279/348
Fans omitted if high efficiency

power supply option chosen
1
DRAM memory
Flash memory
1'
Connector panel
Light IDU
Flash memory
Fans
1
7
5
4
6
Connector panel
Main (Classic) IDU
10
Connector panel
Access IDU
Fans
1
7
6
5
4
8
9
Connector panel
Extension IDU
Figure 190 Layout of boards in the indoor units
280/348
7.7
Telephone service channel
7.7.1 Deleting, inserting or changing telephone numbers

Open the CT and select the menu Configuration/System Settings and click on the Overhead tab.
To cancel use of the telephone on the IDU, check the Disabled option and click Apply.
To enable use of the telephone on the IDU, make sure that the Enabled button is checked. If not,
click it to activate it.
Enter the telephone number and then click Apply.
Close the System Settings window.
7.7.2 Configuring the ESC 2

ESC2 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see figures 191 and 192) on the digital MCUNUM
board (3CC06088AAxx, for an IDU/ODU digital link), or on the analogue MCU board (3CC05714AAxx for an
analogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the table below:
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S504 (S104*),
S505 (S105*)
ESC 2 level
audio input
-13 dBm
S506 (S106*),
S507 (S107*)
ESC 2 level
audio output
0 dBm
0 dBm
+4 dBm
* for an IDU/ODU analogue link

ESC2 is available on the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 connectors.
NOTE: If you want a TTL interface with E&M (TRON/RON) type signalling, close swap SW517 (SW115*).
281/348
7.8
Hardware configuration of service channels 3, 4 and 5 (classic and

extension IDU)
The 9400 UX can have up to five ESCs (except in a 2 x 2 Mbit/s configuration in which only three are possible);
for more details, refer to 2.3. Only ESC1 (NMS 1 and NMS 2 connectors) cannot be configured manually.
7.8.1 Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the main IDU without ESC extension
Update the information form needed to install the station (Appendix 2).
ESC3, ESC4 and ESC5 can be configured on the main IDU, by switches (see Figures 191 and 192) located
on the digital MCUNUM board (3CC06088AAxx, for a digital IDU/ODU link), or on the analogue MCU board
(3CC05714AAxx for an analogue IDU/ODU link), in accordance with the following table:
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S510 (S110*)
ESC 3 port
Clock inversion
No inversion
Inversion
S511 to S515
(S111* to S115*)
ESC 3 port
Format
V11
V28
S508 (S108*)
ESC 4 port
Clock inversion
No inversion
Inversion
S509 (S109*)
ESC 5 port
Clock inversion
No inversion
Inversion
* for an analogue IDU/ODU link

service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5, are available on the ESC EXT connector.
7.8.1.1 V.11 V.28 conversion on ESC N 3
Power down the main IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
Open the unit.
Set switches S511 (S111*) to S515 (S115*) on the MCU board to the required position (see 7.7.2).
Set switch S510 (S110*) according to the required clock polarity (see 7.7.2).
Close the unit.
Reconnect the main IDU to the power source and power up again.
282/348
C115
CR103
CR102
CR101
Y103
P101
MX104
MX112
MX119
L101
MX114
SW108
MX103
MX105
SW102SW103
SW101
1
6
1
6
A1
B1
MX109
MX108
Q101 CR104 MX101 MX102
J101
CR107
C102
SW105
C113
MX110
1
1
1
1
6
1
6
L101
MX105
SW102SW103
SW101
MX103
SW109
MX118
C120
C119
R105
R107
R106
R108
MX117
MX121
C131
MX126
MX122
P101
MX104
SW108
MX114
C118
R103
R104
MX115
C123MX116
CR102
CR101
CR103
Y103
MX112
MX119
T103
T108
MX148
LS101
S112 S113 S114 S115
MX123
MX130
MX136
SW118
S103
C179
MX177
1
14
1
SW109
K102
SW124
MX164
MX154
SW119
CR123
SW120
MX161
P104
MX176
CR122
MX149
MX144
MX135
MX129
MX128
C133
CR115
S106 S107 SW114
SW115
CR116
S108
MX127
MX134
C141
Y105
Y106
S111
R129
MX175
13
25
50
CR124
C124
C125
R111
C126CR110 R113 R114R115
R109
SW110
R110
CR113
CR112
SW112
T102 T1041
MX120 Q102C128 C129SW111
CR114
CR111
T101
T106
T105 T1071
S104 S105
CR120
C159
MX150
MX174
FL110SW133
J113
CR142
SW134
1
2
R133
CR133
MX168
MX167
C186
R138
CR136
C185 R140
FL109
Q105
Q106
MX158
Y107
A1
B1
MX101 MX102
MX108
C115
C120
C119
R105
R107
R106
R108
MX118
S103
J106
MX173
1
1
1
1
J101
Q101 CR104
MX109
CR107
C102
SW105
C113
MX110
C118
R103
R104
MX117
MX123
C124
R113 R114R115
SW110
CR113
CR112
SW112
C129SW111
CR111
CR114
Q102 C128
MX122
MX130
MX142
MX160
S108
MX172
CR106
S107
S105 S106
P103
P108
CR143
CR144
C130
MX115
C123 MX116
C131
MX126
MX121
MX120
1
1
C125
R111
C126CR110
R109
R110
T102 T1041
T103
T1071
T108
MX129
MX128
MX136
SW118
CR124
MX154
MX164
SW124
K102
1
6
1
6
C109C103
J115
T101
T105
T106
S104 S105
LS101
MX135
MX144
MX149
C179
SW119
CR123
SW120
MX161
MX177
5
9
5
9
R126
CR106
C133S106 S107 SW114

CR115
SW115
CR116
S108
MX127
MX134
MX148
CR122
S112 S113 S114 S115

MX168
MX176
P104
1
14
1
2
CR108 L102
J108
C141
Y105
Y106
S111
R129
C186
Q106
MX175
13
25
CR125
CR120
C159
MX150
MX158
Y107
FL110 SW133
R133
CR133
MX167
R138
CR136
C185 R140
FL109
Q105
MX174
CR142
SW134
1
2
50
J106
MX173
J113
MX160
MX172
P108
SW121
SW123SW122
I/O
connector
on
connector
panel
CR143
CR144
CR105
C155
CR130
C151
SW132
C134 C132
C139 SW113
C140
C171
R125
C160
C172
283/348
2
3
1
C110
C101
C122
C108
C127
C114
SW104
C107
S115
CR125
R102
C143
CR108 L102
J108
C121
R143
R139
J115
C151
S104
2
3
1
C110
CR105
C155
R125
C160
C172
R126
R112
C169
R123
C157
C170
C154
R124
R134C176
C180R130
C188
R135
R142 C181C177
R136R131
C182
R137
R132C178
S110
C168
R122
C175
S109
R121
S112
S113
S114
C108
C127
C109C103
C130
C101
C122
C171
C116
R101
C117
C191
C167
S111
SW115
R146
R147
R148
S110
MX142
P103
1
6
1
6
S109
SW121
SW123SW122
C154
S515
CR130
S110
R139
R143
S514
SW132
R112
C114
S513
5
9
5
9
S511
S507
S505 S506
S504
SW104
C107
C121
C169
R123
C157
C170
R134C176
C180R130
C188
R135
R142 C181 C177
R136 R131
C182
R137
R132 C178
C168
R122
C175
S109
R121
C134 C132
C139 SW113
C140
R102
C143
C191
C167
R148
R124
C116
R101
C117
S512
SW517
R146
R147
S510
S508
S509
POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCUNUM BOARD (DIGITAL): 3CC06088AAxx
I/O connector on connector panel
Figure 191 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with digital IDU/ODU link
POSITIONS OF SWITCHES ON THE MCU BOARD (ANALOGUE): 3CC05714AAxx
Figure 192 - Locations of switches on the MCU board with analogue IDU/ODU link
7.8.2 Configuring ESC 3, 4 and 5 in the ESC extension unit
service channels 3, 4 and 5 can be configured in the extension IDU, on the SCU board and the
daughter boards that it supports.
7.8.2.1 Configuring service channels 3 and 4
ESC3 position
ESC4 position
Figure 193 Positions of service channels 3 and 4 in the ESC extension unit
ESC 3 and ESC 4 can be customized via daughter boards ESC 1 to ESC 5 described below. These boards
are installed on the SCU board in the extension unit.
284/348
ESC 1 board: 3CC05710AAxx (64 kbit/s G703 point-to-point)

This ESC board is an add-on board which will support a 64 kbit/s ESC with codirectional interface.
Switch positions (customizing ESCs 3 and 4):
Figure 194 Switch Positions onboard 3CC05710AAxx (Botttom view)
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S201
Synchronization (not active on this equipment)
Channel 2 bit
(special)
Channel 2 byte
(Normal)
S202
Synchronization
Channel 1 bit
(special)
Channel 1 byte
(Normal)
285/348
ESC 2 board: 3CC05711AAxx (analogue ESC, point-to-multipoint or point-to-point)

The ESC board 3CC05711AAxx supports a point-to-point or point-to-multipoint type analogue ESC.
Figure 195 Switch Positions onboard 3CC05711AAxx (botttom view)

The underside of the board with the settings can be accessed only when removed.
SETTING
286/348
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S501
Output level
+4 dBm
0 dBm
S502
TTL interface with E&M

type configuration
disabled
Enabled
S503
Input level
0 dBm
-13 dBm
S504
ESC type
Point-to-multipoint
Point-to-point
ESC 3 board: 3CC05712AAxx(64 kbit/s V11 or V28 point-to-point)

The ESC board 3CC05712AAxx supports a V11 or V28 compliant ESC operating at 64 kbit/s.
Figure 196 Switch Positions onboard 3CC05712AAxx (botttom view)

SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S201, S203, S205, S208, S210, S212,

S214, S215, S216, S220, S222
Operator interface type
V11
V28
S206
Transmitted clock inversion
No inversion
(*)
Inversion
(*)
S207
Received clock inversion
No inversion
(*)
Inversion
(*)
287/348
(*)
no inversion:
Data
bit n
bit n+1
Clock
2D
inversion:
Data
Clock
bit n
bit n+1
2D
Figure 197 Clock and Data signals onboard 3CC05712AAxx
CAUTION:
The recommended position is the clock inversion for V11 and no inversion for V28:
inversion of S206 in V11, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S207.
inversion of S207 in V28, 64 Kbits and no inversion of S206.
288/348
ESC 4 board: 3CC05713AAxx

The 3CC05713AAxx ESC board is an optional daughter board that can be installed on the extension IDU SCU
board for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.
It supports a V11 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channel:
a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1 and PM2), or
two engineering service channels (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) or
point-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), the second point-to-point (PP2A).
Figure 198 Switch positions onboard 3CC05713AAxx

Switch positions
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S101
Link type
S102
V11 bit rate
Point-to-multipoint
1 x (9600 bit/s max.)
Point-to-point
2 x (4800 bit/s max.)
289/348
ESC 5 board: 3CC06482AAxx

The engineering service channel board 3CC06482AAxx is an optional daughter board that is installed on the
extension IDUs SCU ESC mother board for configurations with engineering service channels 3 and 4.
It supports V28 compliant digital asynchronous engineering service channels,
a ESC (9.6 kbit/s maximum), point-to-point (PP1) or point-to-multipoint (PM1, PM2), or
two ESC (4.8 kbit/s maximum), the first point-to-point (PP1A) or point-to-multipoint (PM1A, PM1B), the
second point-to-point (PP2A).
Figure 199 Switch positions onboard 3CC06482AAxx
Switch positions
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S101
Link type
S102
V28 bit rate
290/348
Point-to-multipoint
1 x (9600 bit/s max.)
Point-to-point
2 x (4800 bit/s max.)
7.8.2.2 Configuring ESC 5

The two possible configurations of ESC 5 (V11 or V28) are obtained by setting switches on the SCU board, of
which there are several versions (see page 284).
SETTING
SWITCH
CHARACTERISTIC
S502 to S505
(S102* to S105*)
and S507 to S510
(S107* to S110*)
ESC 5 format
V11
V28
S511 (S111*)
Transmit and receive clock inversion on

ESC 5 port
Inversion
No
inversion
* on SCU with analogue ODU/IDU link

S510
S508
S509
S505
S507
S503
S504
S502
S511
Figure 200 Switch positions on the SCU board wiith digital IDU/ODU link
S110
S108
S109
S105
S107
S104
S103
S102
S111
Figure 201 Switch positions on the SCU board wiith analog IDU/ODU link
291/348
7.8.2.3 Method
Power down the extension IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
Open the unit.
If the change entails changing the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter board, change as necessary.
Configure ESC 3 and/or ESC 4:
Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see 7.8.2).
Configure ESC 5:
Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) of the SCU board to the
V11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to the
required clock polarity (see 7.8.2).
Close the unit.
Reconnect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.
If a change has been made to the ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 daughter boards, connect the CT and run the
Configuration/Quick Config procedure. (see 4.8.5).
In Quick Config Step 1, make sure that the appropriate values are selected for ESC3 and ESC4.
Run Quick Config until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.
7.8.3 Adding an ESC extension IDU
If adding an ESC unit, the positions of ESC 3 and 4 may be fitted with daughter boards.
If the station has back-to-back terminals, transmission of the ESCs from one terminal
to the other is performed in baseband and the extension units of each of the terminals
must be fitted with daughter boards.
Do not connect the extension IDU to the power source.
Open the extension IDU to be added and check the configuration of the engineering service channels
(ESCs 3 and 4 daughter boards, SCU boards for ESC 5). If the configuration needs to be changed:
ESC 3 and/or ESC 4 configuration:
Configure the replaced board or modify the configuration of the existing board (see 7.8.2).
ESC 5 configuration:
Set switches S502 (S102*) to S505 (S105*) and S507 (S107*) to S510 (S110*) on the SCU board to the
V11 or V28 setting according to the required configuration. Set switch S511 (S111*) according to the
required clock polarity (see 7.8.2).
Close the unit.
Install the unit and connect it to the main IDU (see 3.6).
Connect the extension IDU to the power source and power up again.
Connect the CT and run the Configuration/Quick Config procedure. (see 4.8.5).
If the previous NE configuration was 1 + 0, change it to 1 + 0EXT. In all other cases leave it unchanged.
Change the ESC3 and ESC4 values to the appropriate value.
Run Quick Config until the end in order to apply these new values to the NE.
292/348
7.9
Configuring ESC3 and the NMS ports (Light IDU versions)
7.9.1 Switch positions

The light 9400 UX has:
one engineering service channel, ESC3,
two network management ports, NMS1 and NMS2.
For more details, refer to 2.3.

These ports can be set to V.11 format (factory configuration) or V.28 format using the switch modules on the
MCU board installed in the IDU (see Figure 185) :
S101 configures ESC3,
S106 configures the NMS1 port,
S107 configures the NMS2 port.
OFF
ON
V.11 configuration (factory set)
Switch 9 reverses the clock

OFF
ON
Clock state
Switch state
Forward
OFF
Reversed
ON
V.28 configuration
Figure 202 Selecting the V.11 or V.28 configuration and clock direction
7.9.2 Methodology
V.11 V.28 conversion of ESC3, NMS1 and NMS2
Power down the IDU and disconnect it from the power source.
Open the unit (see 7.6).
Set switch modules S101, S106 and S107 on the MCU board, with switches 1 to 8 set as described
in 7.9.1.
To alter the polarity of the clock, adjust switch 10 on the same switch modules (see 7.9.1)
Close the unit.
Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.
293/348
7.10
Configuring remote indication loops
7.10.1 Classic (main) IDU remote indication

The equipment has eight remote indication loops configured as normally open (see 2.4). These loops can
be configured as normally closed by altering the swap configuration on the MCU board according to the drawing
below.
1
6
1
6
C109
C103
5
9
5
9
2
3
1
C110 C104
C105
C111
P102
CR106
L101
CR108
L102
MX106
CR109
SW109
P101
SW108
SW102
SW101 SW103
MX104 MX103 MX105
MX112
MX114
MX113
SW107 S102
C112
C106
S101
Y102
DS101
Y101
SW106
MX111
J103
J104
FL101 MX124
FL102
FL105
72
72
FL103
FL104
TB102TB101
MX107
MX125
C165
L103
MX143
C144
MX119
S103
L110
R127
R128
C164
C138
C184 J109
C183
CR139
MX171
R144
R145
J112C752
L113
J117
C136
MX170
C190
C193
L112
C137
C142
C148
DS102
MX139
R141 MX163
C189
C130
C135
J110
J116
CR129
CR135
CR138
CR132
MH101
CR134
CR128
CR137
CR131
SW110
CR113
CR112
SW112
SW111
CR111
CR114
MX123
CR115
CR116
J115
MX130
MX129
MX136
SW118
J118
SW119
CR123
SW120
CR124
C151
Y104
J105 MX131MX132
L104
CR117
MX133
L105
SW116
MX138
CR118 MX137
CR119 R117 R116
R118
L106
FL106
SW117
MX145C153
C152 J107
MX146
FL107L107
MX147 C156
Q103
C161
R119
C158
MX151
K101 CR121 C162
C163
R120
C166
MX153 L109
Q104
L108
C753 C173
FL108
C174 CR126 L111
MX162
CR127 MX159
K105
DS103
A102
CR122
K104
MX155MX156 MX157
MX154
C179
MX164
MX165 MX166
K103
L114
P106
1
6
1
6
A101
J108
CR125
C192
CR140
FL111
MX161
SW132
SW127
SW131
SW129
SW124
SW125
SW126
SW128
SW130
K102
5
9
5
9
TS7:SW125
TS6:SW126
TS5:SW127
TS1:SW128
TS2:SW129
TS4:SW130
TS3:SW131
P105
1
6
1
6
TS7:SW529
TS6:SW530
TS5:SW531
TS1:SW532
TS2:SW533
TS4:SW534
TS3:SW535
5
9
5
9
TS8:SW124
1
14
21
TS8:SW528
MX176 MX177
SCU board with analog

IDU/SCU link
P104
SCU board with digital

IDU/ODU link
J102
Figure 203 Positions of swaps on the MCU board

To obtain normally closed remote indication loops, you must alter the positions of the soldered links on swaps
SW 124 to SW 127 and SW 129 to SW 131 as described below.
Loop type
Normally open
Normally closed
294/348
Unactivated
Alarm condition
RS input
RS input
RS input
RS input
Swap position
Prewired swap
Change swap position :

1) cut strap
2) insert new strap
7.10.1.2 Method
Changing the configuration of remote indication loops 1 to 8 entails moving soldered links on the MCU board.
Disconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.
Open the main IDU (see 7.6).
Alter the swap positions on the MCU board.
Close the unit.
Connect the new remote indications.
Reconnect the main IDU to power source and power up again.
Declare the names of the new RIs with the CT by selecting the External Points tab. For each input
port, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.
Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green to
yellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.
295/348
7.10.2 Light IDU versions remote indication

The equipment has eight remote indication loops set as normally open loops (see 2.4).
These loops can be set to normally closed operation by adding 0 ohm resistors to the MCU board as shown
in the diagram below.
P101
1
20
1
20
5
1
9
6
5
1
9P102
6
P103
C133
C134
L107
R119
R120
FL105MX158MX146
MX160
C128
MX164
R102
RI3 : R110
C151
C153
DS102
A101
A102
R104 R105
RI1 : R115
RI2 : R102
C152
FL107
CR126
R122
R123
C139C141
C143
K104 K105 C138
C140C142
C146 MX168
C147
C148
C144
C132
C145 CR118
C107
MX136
ON
CR120
MX162
ON
C121L104
CR114
FL104
R118
K101 R117
L106
L105
MX159
C135C136
FL106 C137
L108
CR119
MX165
MX166
L112
L109
J107R121
L110
CR121
CR127
MX171
MX170
C149
J108
C150
L111
19
37
19
37
ON
T108
95
S108 S109
K103
ON
T107
MX169 MX163
CR123
CR122
MX167 K102
ON
T106
CR125
ON
T105
CR124
ON
MX137MX138
FL101
J106
FL103
DS101
L102
CR107
MX144
C119
L103MX145
CR108
C118
MX155
MX154
C122
MX153
C123
C124
CR111
C125
CR112
C126 C127
Y107
MX156
C129
Y108
C131T101 T102 T103 T104 CR116 CR117
C130S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107
CR115
S101
10
1 10
1 10
1 10
1 10
1 10
1 10
1
MX161
R106
R112
J104J103
MX157
MX152MX143
L101
61
MX125
C110
MX151
MX148
MX131
MX120
MX114
MX135
MX134
MX150
MX141
MX133
MX149
MX139
MX132
MX147
C102
MX129
FL102
C106
C104
C105
C103
C113
C112
Y103
C116
C111
C109C117 Y104
CR109
CR110
Y106
CR113 Y105
CR106
CR105
MX140
C108
J105
C114
MX142
C115
C120
MX128
72
Y102
SW103 CR102
CR103
MX127
CR104
MX126
MX130
MX119
MX123
MX122
J102
72
MX124
MX121
MX115
J101 A1 R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
C101
Y101
B1
MX102
MX103
MX104
R106MX101
MX107
MX105 MX106
R109 R111
R107R108
R110
MX108
MX109
MX110
MX111
MX118
R113
R115 R116
MX112 MX113
R112
R114
MX116 MX117
SW102
SW101
CR101
R108
R110
R115
RI4 : R105
RI5: R108
RI6: R112
RI7 : R104
RI8 : R106
Figure 204 Locations of housekeeping loop resistors on the MCU board
Loop type
Normally open
Normally closed
296/348
Unactivated
Alarm condition
RS input
RS input
RS input
RS input
7.10.2.2 Method
To change the configuration of the remote indication loops 1 to 8 to normally closed loops you must fit 0 ohm
SMC resistors to the MCU board.
Disconnect all tributary, service channel and interunit cables (See 3.7.1).
Open the IDU (see 7.6).
Solder zero value SMC resistors to the MCU board, in the positions shown in Figure 204.
Close the unit.
Connect the new remote indication loops directly to the ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector or via a cross
connect panel.
Reconnect the IDU to the power source and power up again.
Declare the names of the new remote indication loops with the CT by selecting the External Points
tab. For each input port, a dedicated alarm profile can be used.
Check the operation of the remote indication loops by verifying that their color changes from green to
yellow, blue, brown, or red (depending on the alarm profile) when the corresponding loop is active.
7.11
Changing redundancy configurations
7.11.1 Changing from 1+0 to 1+1 without ESC extension or MUX protection
Install the extension IDU.
Connect the tributary, engineering service channel and inter-IDU cables (See 3.7.1).
Connect the extension IDU to the power source.
If necessary, change the software key on the main IDU (1+1 max).
Install the new ODU configuration, referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, extension IDU
link cable.
Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).
297/348
7.11.2 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 without multiplexer protection

Power down the main IDU.
Install the extension IDU (check the ESC configuration, see 7.8.2).
Connect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see AUCUN LIEN ).
Connect the extension IDU to the power source.
Install the new ODU configuration referring to section 3: ODU, HSB coupler, antenna, link cable with
extension IDU.
Recommission the station and, if necessary, the link (section 5).
7.11.3 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection and access IDU
Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables.
Open the main IDU, and the access IDU.
If there is one, open the extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in the new
extension IDU.
Check that the number of physical ports on the main and extension IDUs are the same.
On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, check that the tributary impedance selection straps are set
to Protection.
On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection.
On the LAU combination board of the access IDU, check the positions of the impedance selection
straps.
Close the units.
Reconnect the main and extension IDUs to the power source.
link cable.
Reconnect the tributary, service channel and interunit cables (see AUCUN LIEN ).
Recommission (section 5).
298/348
7.11.4 Adding MUX protection with access IDU to a 1+1 configuration

This change of configuration entails replacing the extension IDU with a version supporting multiplexer protection
and the addition of an access IDU.
Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.
Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.
On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the tributary impedance selection straps to Protection.
On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, check that the tributary impedance selection straps are set
to Protection.
Close the units again.
Open the access IDU.
Check, on the LAU combination board, the positions of the impedance selection straps.
Close the unit again.
Install the new units (extension and access IDU).
Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see AUCUN LIEN ).
link cable.
299/348
7.11.5 Upgrading from 1+0 to 1+1 with multiplexer protection without access IDU
This procedure is only avalaible if the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
Power down the main IDU. Disconnect it from the power source.
Disconnect the tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables
Check that the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
Open the main IDU, and the access IDU.
If there is one, open the VSD extension IDU, remove the customizing boards and install them in the
new extension IDU.
On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
Close the units.
Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see AUCUN LIEN ).
link cable.
Reconnect the tributary, service channel and interunit cables (see AUCUN LIEN ).
300/348
7.11.6 Adding MUX protection without access IDU to a 1+1 configuration

This procedure is only avalaible if the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
This change of configuration entails replacing the extension IDU with a version supporting multiplexer
protection.
Power down the main and extension IDUs. Disconnect them from the power source.
Check that the IDU type is (see 7.2.2.2).
Open the main IDU and the new extension IDU.
On the LAU boards of the extension IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
On the LAU boards of the main IDU, set the straps according to 7.2.2.2.
Close the units.
Install the new extension IDU.
Connect the cable(s) 3CC13659AAxx (see AUCUN LIEN ).
Reconnect all tributary, service channel and inter-unit cables (see AUCUN LIEN ).
link cable.
301/348
7.12
Changing power level
7.12.1 All frequency bands except 9418UXR201 and A9418UXR202

This operation is a software option.
In the classic IDU version, the main unit must in addition be fitted with a key
providing access to this functionality (TPC:Y labelling on the key).
Update the information sheet need to install the station (Appendix 2).
Modify the output power from the CT using the Radio tab and then the RTPC tab.
7.12.2 Frequency bands without RTPC

You may need to open the ODU to insert an attenuator to adjust the output power using integrated attenuator
kits, the references of which are:
Value
3 dB
6 dB
10 dB
13 GHz to 18 GHz
3CC08543AAxx
3CC08543ABxx
3CC08543ACxx
THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY, DUST FREE LOCATION
PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING ATTENUATORS :

Undo the four M4 screws at the corners of the ODU (3 mm Allen key)
The four nuts are unsecured and can easily be lost!
Remove the cover.
Depending on version, carefully disconnect the top board.

13 GHz with semirigid coaxial cable:
To dismantle: undo the two ends of coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (use an
8 mm torque wrench).
To reassemble: screw the attenuator onto the RF amplifier plug and the coaxial coupling onto the
filter plug.
Replace the coaxial link between the filter and the RF amplifier.
Tighten the attenuator, coaxial coupling and the two ends of the coaxial link using the 8 mm torque
wrench.
13 GHz with flexible semirigid coaxial cable:
302/348
Procedure as above, without the use of the coaxial coupling.
15 and 18 GHz with semirigid coaxial cable:
To dismantle, undo the plug at the filter end of link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (TX
output) using an 8 mm torque wrench.
To reassemble, screw the attenuator onto the filter plug. Tighten with an 8 mm torque wrench.
Replace coaxial link W06 between the filter and the RF amplifier (tighten with an 8 mm torque
wrench).
Replace the top board if applicable (depending on version).
With a small screwdriver, remove the units ring seal from its groove.
Press alongside the connectors to lock it in position.

Do not scratch the casting!
Fit a new seal (caution: handle with care because it is fragile!)
Imperative: Position the seals vulcanized coupling in a corner.
Depending on version, if there is a top board present, check for presence of the CHOTERM foam pads
on the bottom of the cover.
Replace the cover and check the positioning of the front panel polarizer.
Tighten the four M4 screws with their nuts using the torque wrench with a socket cap tip to a torque
of 1Nm + 0.2/0.
Affix to the unit (on the handle side), the label supplied with the kit, marking on it the internal attenuators
value.
POSITIONING THE ATTENUATOR IN THE ODU
Attenuator
Attenuator
W06
RF
Filter
Filt.
13 GHz
Position of coaxial coupling.
To be fitted in 13 GHz ODU with
semirigid coaxial cable.
15 and 18 GHz
RF
amplifier
W06
Depending on frequency band, cable W06

may be connected to the other filter plug.
303/348
7.13
Changing 1+1 HSB coupler polarization
This operation must be carried out before installing the coupler on the pole mounting. This applies only to
configurations with integrated antenna.
THIS OPERATION MUST BE CARRIED OUT IN A DRY AND DUST-FREE LOCATION.
IMPORTANT NOTE: NEVER REMOVE THE ROUND YELLOW PADS THAT ARE USED
TO SEAL THE SYSTEM.
Dismantling
1) Place the coupler on the table, with the microwave nose (which mates with that of the antenna)
uppermost, and undo the four M6 screws using an M5 Allen key, then remove the nose; you can now
see the waveguide to be replaced.
2) On the side nose corresponding to the standby ODU and marked COUPLED ACCESS on the
casting, insert the 2.5 mm Allen key (M3 screw) and undo the four screws securing the flexible
waveguide.
3) Using a 5 mm Allen key (M6 screw), undo the four screws securing the side-mounted COUPLED
ACCESS nose and remove the nose.
4) Using a 16/17 mm box wrench and an 8 mm Allen key, dismantle: the four M10 socket cap screws
+ four nuts + eight flat washers + four crinkle washers, holding the two shells of the HSB coupler
together.
5) Open the HSB casing and, with a 2.5 mm Allen key, remove the straight waveguide on the antenna
side to replace it with the twisted waveguide. Pay particular attention to fitting the waveguide gasket
on the coupler.
4
Four M10 socket cap screws

(16/17 mm box wrench + 8 mm Allen key)
Standby ODU port
Antenna port
2
(5 mm Allen key)
1
3

(2.5 mm Allen key)

(5 mm Allen key)
Reassembly
Insert the four M10 socket cap screws 4 in their positions,
Fit the side-mounted nose and the four M3 screws 2 in their positions,
Fit the four M6 screws 3 in their positions on the side-mounted nose,

Tighten the M3 screws and then the M6 screws,
Fit the front-mounted nose and the four M6 screws 1 , and tighten,
Tighten the four M10 screws 4 ,
Replace the HSB coupler, then the ODUs as described in the section on assembling a 1+1 configuration
ODU with HSB coupler and integrated antenna.
On the units label, indicate the antenna waveguides direction of polarization: H (horizontal) with the
twisted guide, V (vertical) for the straight guide.
Twisted waveguide reference

(flextwist)
304/348
13 GHz : 3CC07725AAxx
23/25 GHz : 3CC11264AAxx
7.14
Changing SIMM memory boards
Note:
This procedure enables to evolve from the LUX12/LUX 50 version.
Open the unit ( 7.6).
Open the locking and extract the SIMM board (if any) (Photo ).
Note: Not applicable for the light IDU. The IDU Light LUX 12 has no SIMM board.
Insert the two LUX 50 SIMM boards one after the other (Photo ).
Push the boards backward to lock them.
Close the unit.
Connect the unit to the power source.
Power up the unit again.
Locking
SIMM memory for LUX 1x
SIMM memories for LUX 50
Classic IDU with SIMM memory LUX 1x
Insertion of the SIMM boards
SIMM memories
IDU with SIMM memories LUX 50
Figure 205 Changing SIMM memories
305/348
7.15
Replacing consumable items
7.15.1 MCU board battery

The MCU board of the main IDU (classic or light) has a battery to safeguard the memory which stores
supervision passwords, the last 300 events detected (remote inventory), and so on.
This battery must be replaced every 7 to 10 years if, after powering down, the remote inventory information is
lost when you power up again.
CAUTION
There is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used.
Only replace with a battery of the same type:
M4T28BR12SH1, Supplier: STMicroelectronics
Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries.
Do not burn and do not recharge.
Change the battery (see Figure 206 or 207 depending on the type of IDU). The battery simply plugs
into the printed circuit board.
Close the unit.
Power up the unit.
Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing simultaneously on the main IDU and reload
the configuration from the ODU by pushing the IDUACO/ODU switch on the IDU connector panel
to the ACO/ODU setting. After two minutes at most, the LEDs should stop flashing simultaneously.
Check out operation of the equipment.
306/348
Display panel
MAIN IDU
Connector panel
P502
C512 C507
MX508
MX504
SW506
CR509
MX511
MX513
BATTERY
SW508
1
RAM
memory
J503
Flash memory
72
C531
1
2
MX514
J502
Y502
SW503
1
2
2
1
C509C504
2
1
C511 C506
1
6
1
6
MX507
C510C505
5
9
5
9
SW502
DS501
S502
S501
SW511
CR514
72
Figure 206 Position of the battery on the MCU board (classic IDU)
C101
Y101
MX106
MX107
J102
IDU
MX119
MX118
MX117
CR101
Connector panel
CR102
SW103
CR103
MX126
CR104
MX127
MX128
MX129
J103
J104
BATTERY
RAM memory
72
Flash memory
72
Figure 207 Position of the battery on the light MCU board (Light IDU)
307/348
7.15.2 Changing fans
Note: Both fans must be changed at the same time.

Note the voltage indicated by the used fans (5 or 12 V)
For the 12 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ200 (3CC11761AAxx).
For the 5 Volt fans, use the fan replacement kit 9400UXZ201 (3CC12847AAxx).
Identify the orientation of the fan and extract the fan off its recess (Photo ).
Note the polarities and then disconnect the two fan power supply wires (Photo ).
Connect the power supply wires of the replacement fan (the red wire must be connected to the positive
terminal, marked on the PCB (Photo )).
Insert the new fan in its recess, the same way round as the one removed previously, and with the power
supply wires run along the same path.
Close the unit.
Check that the fans extract air (otherwise, reverse their orientation).
308/348
Fans
Position of the fans
Extraction of the fan
red
black
Disconnection of the power supply wires
Fan polarity
Figure 208 Changing fans
309/348
7.15.3 Changing a fuse of an IDU

The power supply units of the main, extension and Light IDUs versions are protected by two fuses which snap
into their clip mountings. The procedure below describes how to change these fuses.
Open the unit, for IDU, see 7.6.
Remove the suspect fuse and check it with an ohmmeter (if out of service: infinite impedance).
Insert a good fuse.
Close the unit.

Always replace fuses with fuses of the same type:
For the classic IDU (31 x 6 cartridge):
F10H 250 V (10 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).
For the Light IDU (20 x 5 mm cartridge):
With Alcatel power supply: T3,15H250V (3.15 A slow blow fuse, high breaking capacity),
With ARTESYN power supply: F3,15H250V (3.15 A fast blow fuse, high breaking capacity).
If the fuses blow again on power up:

in an installation phase, check the polarity of the external voltage and/or that there is no short circuit
in the power connector,
if the fault occurs in operation, change the IDU.
310/348
Appendix 1 Human exposure to electromagnetic

fields
A.1.1
Introduction
This document explains the precautions that are taken to make sure the electromagnetic waves transmitted by
Alcatel 9400 family of equipment for Low and Medium Capacity Fixed Radio links are harmless for the public.
It provides an evaluation of a safety parameter based on calculations derived from the ICNIRP Guidelines and
the means (i.e. installation rules) by which this safety parameter has to be implemented, where necessary.
It applies to the protection of the public from electromagnetic field radiated by the transmit antenna of the
equipment. It does not apply to the protection of the workers.
The calculations, based on farfield telecommunications equations, provide, in case this hypothesis is not
validated by the result, an overestimated value for the safety limit in the boresight direction of the antenna.
In this latter case, more realistic evaluations could be derived from nearfield calculations, provided that an
adequate model of the antenna is used.
Where several radio equipment are installed on the same site, the contributions from each of them have to be
taken into account for the definition of the global safety parameter. Each radio site is then a particular case and
the safety parameter is no more depending on the characteristics of a single equipment only.
A.1.2
Standards and regulations
A.1.2.1 ICNIRP guidelines

The International Commission on NonIonizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is formally recognized by the
World Health Organization (WHO) to draft health based exposure guidelines. This commission has updated the
guidelines on the thresholds of exposure to electromagnetic fields for frequencies from 0 to 300 GHz
[Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time Varying Electric, Magnetic and Electromagnetic Fields (up
300 GHz), Health Physics, Vol. 74, n4, pp. 499522, April 98]. This document defines the basic restrictions
on the populations level of exposure to electromagnetic fields and from that it derives reference levels for more
straightforward application in the lowest frequency ranges.
A.1.2.2 European regulation

The R&TTE Directive [Directive1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 March 1999 on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity]
is effective since April 2000. The objective of this Directive is to define the rules for allowing CE marking of these
equipment so that they can be placed on the market. These rules rely on harmonised standards. The article 3.1.a
of the Directive states that the following essential requirements are applicable to all apparatus: The protection
of the health and safety of the user and any other person, including the objectives with respect to safety
requirements contained in Directive 73/23/EEC, but with no voltage limits. The Directive 73/23/EEC of
February 1973 defines the harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to electrical equipment designed
for use within certain voltage limits (from 100 V to 100 kV).
The European Commission has also published the Council recommendation 1999/519/EC of July 12 on the
limitation of the exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 to 300 GHz). The limits defined in
this recommendation are based on the ICNIRP guidelines of April 1998 for the general public
311/348
A.1.3
Evaluation of safety parameters
As far as ALCATEL 9400 infrastructure is concerned, the level of human exposure to electromagnetic waves
is characterized by the power density, which represents the basic restriction at those frequencies.
The following formula gives the power density assuming far field propagation of RF fields in free space. Then,
the power density at a distance D in the main lobe of an antenna of gain G with an input power Pf is:
DP=
Pf G
4p D2
(1)
Far field propagation assumption is valid at a distance equal to or higher than Dff from the antenna such that
Dff>2D2/, where D is the largest dimension of the antenna and the wave length.
Considering antennas with high gain, the safety parameter is first evaluated in the direction of the main lobe.
The distance DL where exposure level may reach the exposure limit DPL is provided by formula (2).
DL (m) =
PfG(W )
4p DPL(W / m2)
(2)
Formula (2) overestimates the safety distance if it is lower than the far field distance Dff.
312/348
A.1.4
Safety parameters
Based on the maximum power of the equipment, the following table gives the safety distances for the general
public. Theses distances are valid for 1+0 and 1+1 configurations.
If the transmitted power changes (see 7.12), the safety distance can be calculated using the formula given
in Appendix 1.3 above.
Equipment
9411 UX
9413 UX
9413 UX 16 QAM
9415 UX
9415 UX RTPC
9418 UX
9418 UX
Frequency range
(GHz)
10 7 11 73
10,711,73
12 75 13 25
12,7513,25
12 75 13 25
12,7513,25
14,415,35
,
,
14,415,35
,
,
17,719,7
,
,
17,719,7
,
,
Antenna
gain
(dBi)
Maximum
power
(dBm)
Safety Distance in
front of the antenna
(meters)
35,3
24
2,8
38,3
24
41,5
24
5.9
45,1
24
8.8
35,3
25
2,9
38,3
25
4,1
41,5
25
45,1
25
35,3
21
1,8
38,3
21
2,6
41,5
21
3,8
45,1
21
5,7
31,1
21
1,1
36,5
21
2,1
40
21
3,2
42,5
21
4,2
46
21
6,3
31,1
24
1,6
36,5
24
40
24
4,5
42,5
24
46
24
8,9
33,3
16,5
0,9
38,6
16,5
1,6
42,1
16,5
2,4
44,6
16,5
3,2
47,8
16,5
4,6
33,3
24,5
2,2
38,6
24,5
42,1
24,5
44,6
24,5
47,8
24,5
11,6
313/348
Equipment
9423 UX 4QAM
Q
9423 UX 16QAM
Q
Frequency range
(GHz)
21,223,6
,
,
21,223,6
,
,
9425 UX 4QAM
24 5 26 5
24,526,5
9425 UX 16QAM
24 5 26 5
24,526,5
9438 UX 4QAM
37 39 5
3739,5
9438 UX 16QAM
37 39 5
3739,5
314/348
Antenna
gain
(dBi)
Maximum
power
(dBm)
Safety Distance in
front of the antenna
(meters)
34,9
19
1,4
40,1
19
2,5
43,6
19
3,8
46,1
19
5,1
49,4
19
7,4
34,9
17
1,1
40,1
17
43,6
17
46,1
17
49,4
17
5,9
36
18
1,4
41,1
18
2,5
36
16
1,1
41,1
16
39,6
16
1,7
44,5
16
39,6
14
1,4
44,5
14
2,4
A.1.5
Implementation of protection rules
In order to comply with the previously mentioned distance constraints, a safety parameter must be materialized
along with the proper regulatory signaling and warning,
unless the following mounting rules could be implemented for the antennas or outdoor equipment with
embedded antennas; they must be placed:
At the edge of the roof in a position such as nobody can sit or stand in front of the antenna within the
applicable distance mentioned above.
OR
Against an outside wall or under a roof, with no obstacle within 2 meters in the direction of the signal
transmission, taking into account the antenna aperture.If the antenna is placed on a balcony, it should
be placed in a position such as nobody can pass in front of it. This means that: either the equipment
is fixed on the outside wall, not on the wall between the balcony and the building, and pointed toward
the outside with no obstacle within 2 meters; or the access to the balcony must be closed and proper
marking used.
OR
If none of these mountings is possible, then a safety parameter must be materialized along with the proper
regulatory signaling and warning.
These rules apply to the general public and therefore do not apply in case the equipment is installed in
professional premises of an Operator with no access to the public, provided that the access to the so defined
area around the equipment be restricted to workers having received an adequate information on EMF risks.
These constraints are based on a theoretical general worst case study.
A.1.6
Conclusion
Alcatel 9400 transmit nonionizing electromagnetic waves at a very low power, not exceeding 1 Watt at lower
frequencies.
Our installation rules make sure that it is impossible for anybody to sit or stand in front of the antenna within these
distances either by the physical position of the antenna or with a safety parameter.
These installation rules are followed by our installation teams and any of our subcontractors and are they part
of the instructions delivered along the equipment for installation by our customers or by third parties.
315/348
Appendix 2 Installation information

Station
Station name
Name of terminal in station *

Main
Extension
Access
Name of remote terminal *
IDU N
Remote terminal site
ODU N
Remote terminal azimuth
Software version
Power supply
24 V
48 V
* CAUTION ! No more than eight characters allowed by MS-DOS

1+0
without ESC ext
Hardware configuration
Software key
Max config.
1+0
with ESC ext
Max capacity
1+1 HSB
1 antenna
TPC
1+1 HSB
2 antennas
1+1
Frequency div.
Modulation
Tributaries
Terminal bit rate (Limited by the interface boards and the

software key installed)
Tributary board type
Tributary
Name
Impedance
2 x 2 Mbit/s
BNC1.6/5.6Terminal block
4 x 2 Mbit/s
8 x 2 Mbit/s
16 x 2 Mbit/s
1 x 34 Mbit/s
4 inputs
2 Mbit/s
8 inputs
2 Mbit/s
16 inputs
2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s
Tributary
N 1
N 2
N 3
N 4
N 5
N 6
N 7
N 8
N 9
N 10
N 11
N 12
N 13
N 14
N 15
Impedance: 75 or 120 Ohms for 2 Mbit/s channels only.
316/348
Impedance
BNC1.6/5.6Terminal block
N 16
2 Mbit/s aux.
Tributary cross connect
Name
If no particular matrix is supplied by the network administrator, use the standard configuration.
Radio configuration
Standby
channel
Normal channel
Polarisation (H/V)
Values supplied by network administrator

|FTx FRx | = Duplex separation
Transmit frequency (FTx)

Receive frequency (FRx)
MHz
Value between zero (default) and 31, inserted in transmission and awaited in re
reception, supplied by the network administrator
Transmit
Receive
Standard power
High power
0 dB
3 dB
Normal
Standby
dBm
dBm
Link identification code
Amplifier
(15 and 18 GHz bands only)
Output attenuator
(13, 15 and 18 GHz bands only)
Output power control
(13, 23, 25 and 38 GHz bands only)
Absent
Local loop
(Option)
Present
Absent
6 dB
Superv. bit
rate
10 dB
Present
Engineering service channels (ESC)
Supervision
NE physical address
Bit rate: 9600 bit/s for an 9400XX network

Address: 01 by default
SCC/NMS switching matrix
Apply standard configuration unless a specific matrix is supplied by the network administrator
Station telephone
N
Input level
Output level
ESC extension IDU

Definition of ESCs
ESC N 3
ESC N 4 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s)
ESC N 5 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s)
Caution! No more than one zero in the number. Value supplied by network administrator.
dBm
dBm
Absent
Inte
ter termina
nal cab
able*
Duplex separation
Present
Optional in 1+0 configurations

Standard in 1+1 configurations
V11
V28
ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
64 kbit/s V11
ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
64 kbit/s V11
64 kbit/s V11 or V28
* Check the boxes for which the interterminal link cables need to be installed.
Performance thresholds (triggering alarms)
Early switching request
2 x 2 Mbit/s
4 x 2 Mbit/s
8 x 2 Mbit/s
16 x 2 Mbit/s
1 x 34 Mbit/s
4 QAM minimum values
93 dBm
90 dBm
86 dBm
87 dBm
83 dBm
84 dBm
79.5 dBm
84 dBm
79.5 dBm
Early
switching request
Performance
switching request
Priority
switching request
1E08
1E06
1E03
16 QAM minimum values
Terminal values
Bit error ratio
Average values
Terminal values
317/348
Telesignalling (TS) and remote controls (TC)

Install the loops required and name them in the software (NO: Normally open/NC: Normally closed).
Loop
Name
NO/NC
Loop
TS N 1
TS N 2
TS N 3
TS N 4
TS N 5
TS N 6
Name
NO/NC
TS N 7
TS N 8
TC N 1
Specify the default alarm, equipment and environment alarms (UG, NUG, Disabled, Status).
G784 thresholds
Required if the extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 option is installed, or if the standard 946LUX40 is installed.
Threshold
BBE
ES
SES
UAS
Value
318/348
Appendix 3 Set of consumables

This set is defined for a link, its reference is: 9400UXT002
ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
1AC000570014
Black heat shrinkable sheathing, 3.2 to 1.6 mm
1.2 m
1AC000570017
1.2 m
1AC000570010
1.2 m
1AC001250004
Black heat shrinkable sheathing, 19 to 9.5 mm
1.2 m
1AD012980002
Black Colson cable tie: 350 mm
200
1AD012980003
Black Colson cable tie: 173 mm
100
77085356
Plain cable tie: 95 mm
50
77065004
Scotchfil mastic tape, 38 mm wide, 1.5 m long
77072089
Black marker pen
77970019
Cloth
77970278
Desoldering braid
77974586
7/10 mm diameter solder wire
77062820
White silicon cartridge
1AD020450002
ty-rap cable tie, 46 M-8
10
1AD020460001
ty-rap cable tie, 51 M translucent
20
77081203
Autoamalga. adhesive tape, 19 mm wide, 10 m long
77091318
ty-rap cable tie, 244 M
20
1 kg
1
100 gr
319/348
Appendix 4 Service kit

The service kit is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises:
a cable for connecting to the MAINT connector on the ODU, ref. : 9400UXT102, 3CC07972AAxx
a headset/microphone assembly for links with the indoor unit and the remote station for using the
telephone service channel ESC 2, not available for use with the Light IDU versions, ref.:
1AF00375ABAA.
Cable fixing
P05
P01
P04
AUDIO PINOUT P05

1 Micro P
2 Micro N
3 Speaker P
4 Speaker N (ground)
P02
Cable ref.: 9400UXT102

P03
Figure 209 Cable 9400UXT102
Connector P01 : ODU link, Maintenance socket.
Connector P02 / P03 : Multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.
Connector P04 : Connector for portable PC, reserved for Alcatel use.
Connector P05 : Connector for headset (cannot be used with Light IDU versions).
Right earphone
Left earphone
Male connector External view
Audio equipment ref: 1AF00375ABAA
Figure 210 Audio equipment 1AF00375ABAA
320/348
A.4.1
Short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA for A9400UX flat ODU
The short service kit 3EJ04113AAAA is used when pointing the antennas of each station. It comprises a cable
for connecting to the MAINT connector on the ODU, ref.: 3CC13477AAxx.
P05
P01
P02
P04
P03
Figure 211 Cable 3CC13477AAxx
Connector P01: ODU link, Maintenance socket.
Connector P02: For future use.
Connector P03 / P04:multimeter for measuring AGC voltage.
Connector P05: connector for portable PC. To be used for maintenance purpose or necessity to
upgrade the ODU embedded software.
321/348
Appendix 5 Assembling N type coaxial connectors

A.5.1
Type 1 fitting on cable 1AC001100022
Connector BECLER
BK / 224
Square, 18 mm
across flats
Hex, 20 mm
across flats
Hex, 20 mm
across flats
re
1) Strip 15 mm of outer insulation from the cable

and comb out the braid.
2) Fit onto the cable: the nut, washer, flat gasket

and braid clamp, then fold back the braid over the
braid clamp and cut away the excess.
Strip the core of the cable to the dimensions
opposite.
3) Fit the centre contact fully home on the core of

the cable. Crimp with DANIELS M22520/501 tool
fitted with jaws Y215P (hex: .128 across flats).
If not possible, solder.
CAUTION: DO
INSULATION.
NOT
MELT
THE
CABLE
4) Abut the gasket and washer against the braid

clamp then offer up the end of the cable into the
body of the connector making sure that the
contacts mate correctly with each other.
Screw the nut into the body of the connector
(torque: 500 N/cm).
The connector is now ready for use.
322/348
A.5.2
Type 2 mounting on cable 1AC001100022
Fiche/Connector DELTA OHM

08 250 173
Dnuder la gaine sur 10 mm, mettre lcrou sur la gaine.

Strip cable (10 mm), put the clamping nut on the cable.
Rabattre les 10 mm de tresse sur la gaine.

Fold back the 10 mm of braid over the outer insulation.
Couper le dilectrique et le ruban sur 6 mm.
Cut dielectric & foil over 6 mm.
Souder ou sertir le contact central.
Solder or crimp the contact on the inner conductor.
Monter la partie accouplement entre le ruban et

la tresse du cble.
Fit the coupling part between the foil and the
braid of the cable.
Rabattre la tresse vers lavant du connecteur et

couper le surplus.
Fold the braid towards the front of the connector
and cut away any surplus flush with the connector.
Assembler la partie presse toupe et

accouplement, serrer avec une cl plate 20 mm
(couple maxi 35 N/m).
Mount the gland and coupling part,
tighten with a 20 mm open ended wrench
(Max torque 35 N/m).
323/348
Appendix 6 Pin out of user ports
Main IDU
Access IDU
Extension IDU
Light IDU
Figure 212 IDU connector panels
A.6.1
Tributaries
A.6.1.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries

A.6.1.1.1 19IDU connectors (Main, light, access)
I/O 1 4 Light IDU
I/O (1/8) main IDU
I/O (1/8) access IDU
Connector
2 Mbit/s tributary N
Pin
I/O (9/16) main IDU

I/O (9/16) access IDU
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
In-
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Out
+
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Out
-
30
31
32
33
Light IDU MCU board
4 x 2 Mbit/s boards
LAU: 3CC06058Axxx
LIU: 3CC05818Axxx
34
35
36
37
8 x 2 Mbit/s boards
LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx
16 x 2 Mbit/s boards
LAU: 3CC06059Axxx LIU: 3CC06026Axxx
Ground pins:
10
In+
Light IDU MCU board
Access board
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
LAU: 3CC06059AAxx LIU: 3CC06119Axxx
LAU: 3CC06765AAxx (requires the same configurations in main and extension IDUs)
10 on I/O (1/8) and I/O (9/16) of the main IDU and access IDU,
6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 34, 35, 36, 37 on I/O 1 - 4 of the Light IDU
In 75 ohms version, In+, Out+ are the live input and output pins and In-, Out- are the ground pins for the same signals.
Depending on the boards installed, some connector pins may not be available (areas shaded in the table).
For the automatic configuration, the pin 20 must be grounded at the level of the 75 ohms cable and not connected
in 120 ohms otherwise the switching has to be forced (see chapter 7.2.2.4).
324/348
A.6.1.2 34 Mbit/s tributaries

The 34 Mbit/s port is via 1.6/5.6 connectors:
I/O (9/16) on the main IDU in a configuration without MUX protection,
I/O (9/16) on the access IDU in a configuration with MUX protection.
If the connector system required for the 34 Mbit/s system is BNC, use a BNC/ 1.6/5.6 adapter kit
ref: 3CC08249AAxx (option).
1.6/ 5.6 connector
1.6/ 5.6 connector
34Mbit/s port
I / O ( 9 / 16 )
Auxiliary 2Mbit/s
port
Figure 213 34 Mbit/s tributary connectors

The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port uses female 37-way Sub-D connectors:
I/O (1/8) on the main IDU,
I/O (1/8) on the access IDU.

PIN
SIGNAL
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream
In+
In
Out+
Out
LAU: 3CC06061AAxx
LIU: 3CC06118AAxx
28
19
37
Pin 10: ground; in 75 ohms configurations, In+ and Out+ are the live input and output pins and In- and Out-
are the ground pins for the same signals.
325/348
A.6.2
Engineering service channels
A.6.2.1 Supervision bus interface

Concerns the NMS1 and NMS2 female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main or Light IDU.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
RS 485 data in ()
RS 485 data in (+)
RS 485 clock in ()
RS 485 clock in (+)
Ground
RS 485 data out (+)
RS 485 data out ()
RS 485 clock out (+)
RS 485 clock out ()
A.6.2.2 Telephone ESC with selective calling

Concerns the AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 female 9-way Sub-D connectors on the main IDU.
Pin
1
Signal
Pin
Audio signal from user (+)
Signal
Audio signal from user (-)
Mwire signal
0V
Audio signal to user (-)
Audio signal to user (+)
Ewire signal
+5 V protected
A.6.2.3 Engineering service channels ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5

A.6.2.3.1 Service channel ESC3 on the Light IDU versions: ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector
Female 37-way connector
Out+ pin
Out or 0 V pin
Pin
64 kbit/s transmitted data input
23
Unprotected +5 V
11
64 kHz transmit clock input
24
Ground
12 30
64 kbit/s received data output
20
Reserved for ALCATEL use
3 6 22 25
64 kHz receive clock output
21
326/348
A.6.2.3.2 Without extension unit: ESC EXT connector on the main IDU
ESC3
ESC4
ESC5
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
20
26
13
32
21
27
14
33
8 kHz transmit byte sync input
22
28
23
10
29
15
34
24
11
30
16
35
8 kHz receive byte sync output
25
12
31
ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use)
17
36
0 volt (ground)
18
Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use)
19
(Reserved for Alcatel use)
37
A.6.2.3.3 ESC MAIN connector on extension IDU

ESC3
ESC4
ESC5
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
Out+
pin
Out or 0 V
pin
23
10
29
15
34
24
11
30
16
35
8 kHz transmit byte sync input
25
12
31
20
26
13
32
21
27
14
33
8 kHz receive byte sync output
22
28
ESC processing signal (Reserved for Alcatel use)
17
36
0 volt (ground)
18
Squelch signal for ESCs (Reserved for Alcatel use)
19
DO NOT CONNECT (Reserved for Alcatel use)
37
327/348
A.6.2.3.4 With extension unit

The table below concerns the following connectors:
Female 9-way Sub-D, ESC. 3-1, ESC. 3-2, ESC. 4-1, ESC. 4-2 on the extension IDU.
ESC. 3-1 and ESC. 4-1 connectors
G703 64 kbit/s
signal
Pin
Analogue ESC
signal
G703 64 kbit/s
signal
Pin
Analogue ESC
signal
Received signal (+)
Audio 1 (+) OUT
N.C.
Audio 2 (+) OUT
Received signal ()
Audio 1 () OUT
N.C.
Audio 2 () OUT
Transmitted signal (+)
Audio 1 (+) IN
N.C.
Audio 2 (+) IN
Transmitted signal ()
Audio 1 (-) IN
N.C.
Audio 2 (-) IN
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
E signal 1
N.C.
E signal 2
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
M signal 1
N.C.
M signal 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
N.C. = Not connected.

V11 or V28 * signal
Pin
64 kbit/s
9600 bit/s max.

P to MP
9600 bit/s max.

P to P
2x4800 bit/s max

P to MP + P to P
2x4800 bit/s max.

P to P
Received data (+)
Receiv. PM1 signal (+)
Receiv. PP1 signal (+)
Receiv. PM1A signal (+)
Receiv. PP1A signal (+)
Received data ()
Receiv. PM1 signal ()
Receiv. PP1 signal ()
Receiv. PM1A signal ()
Receiv. PP1A signal ()
Transmitted data (+)
Transm. PM1 signal (+)
Transm. PP1 signal (+)
Transm. PM1A signal (+)
Transm. PP1A signal (+)
Transmitted data ()
Transm. PM1 signal ()
Transm. PP1 signal ()
Transm. PM1A signal ()
Transm. PP1A signal ()
Transmit clock (+)
NC
NC
Transmit clock ()
NC
NC
Received clock (+)
NC
NC
Received clock ()
NC
NC
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
N.C. = Not Connected ; PM = Point-to-Multipoint ; PP = Point-to-point ; * In V28 mode, all the () signals are
grounded.
328/348

V11 or V28 * signal
Pin
9600 bit/s max

P to MP
64 kbit/s
9600 bit/s max

P to P
2x4800 bit/s max

P to MP
2x4800 bit/s max.

P to P
NC
Received PM2 signal (+)
NC
Received PM1B signal (+)
NC
NC
Received PM2 signal ()
NC
Received PM1B signal ()
NC
NC
Transmitted PM2 signal (+)
NC
Transmitted PM1B signal (+)
NC
NC
Transmitted PM2 signal ()
NC
Transmitted PM1B signal ()
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
* In V28 mode, all the () signals are grounded.

The table below concerns the ESC. 5 female 25-way Sub-D connector on the extension IDU.
Signal
DO NOT CONNECT
Reserved for Alcatel use
ESC 5 connector pin

In+
In
Out+
Signal
Out
Reserved for Alcatel use
1, 4, 8, 14,
15, 20
6, 7, 9, 16,
17, 18, 19,
21
ESC 5: Clock
ESC 5: Data
Pin
10
22
12
24
0 volt
11
23
13
25
Not connected
2, 3, 5
In+ and Out+ are the live input (received signal) and output (transmitted signal) pins and In and Out
are the ground pins for the same signals.
329/348
A.6.3
Alarms and TS/TC
The alarm and remote control relays are deenergized in the absence of an alarm.
The remote indication loops (TS) between electrical ground and TS input, can be configured as normally open
or normally closed (in the absence of an alarm), depending on the positioning of the soldered links (swaps)
on the MCU board, as indicated in section 7.10.
A.6.3.1 ESC3 / ALARM I/O connector on the Light IDU versions

Female 37way connector
N/C contact
N/O contact
Common contact
Pin
Pin
Pin
Urgent alarm (SA)
14
15
32
TS1 input
Non urgent alarm (NSA)
33
34
16
TS2 input
26
Alarm Attended state
17
18
35
TS3 input
Housekeeping remote control
36
37
19
TS4 input
27
Signal
Unprotected +5 V
Ground
Reserved for ALCATEL
TS signals
11
TS5 input
12 30
TS6 input
28
TS7 input
10
TS8 input
29
3 6 22 25
A.6.3.2 ALARMS I/O connector on the main IDU

Concerns a female 25pin Sub-D connector.
N/C
contact
N/O
contact
Common
contact
Pin
Pin
Pin
Urgent alarm (SA)
14
TS1 input
TS5 input
Non urgent alarm (NSA)
15
16
TS2 input
20
TS6 input
22
Signal
TS signals
Pin
Pin
Alarm Attended state
17
TS3 input
TS7 input
10
Housekeeping remote control
18
19
TS4 input
21
TS8 input
23
0V
330/348
25
Reserved for ALCATEL
11 12 13 24
A.6.4
IDU F connector
Use of the F connnector requires the F connector adapter cable between the PC cable and the IDU female
9pin subD port.
A.6.4.1 9Pin subD connector wiring

The table below concerns the female 9-pin subD connector used for supervisory PC connection.
Pin
ASSIGNMENT
Pin
ASSIGNMENT
Data Carrier Detect
Data Set Ready
Receive data - level V28
Request to send
Transmit data - level V28
Data Terminal Ready
Clear to send
GND
Not connected
A.6.4.2 F Interface adapter cable wiring

PIN ASSIGNMENT
P1
P2
1
2
Male plug
Female plug
331/348
Appendix 7 Alarm synthesis indicator

The following troubleshooting table pertains to the alarm and status synthesis given in all the screens.
Alarm Synthesis indication
Mnemonic
Alarm / Status Description
Maintenance
CRI
Critical alarm
Synthesis of alarms that needs

troubleshooting (typical: NE isolation).
immediate
MAJ
Major (Urgent) alarm
Synthesis
y
of
troublshooting.
immediate
MIN
Minor (Not urgent) alarm
Synthesis of alarms for which a deferred intervent can

be decided.
Warning alarm
Synthesis of alarms due to failure of other NE in the

network.
IND
Indeterminate alarm
Synthesis of alarms not associated with the previous

severities. Not operative.
EXT
External Point
(Housekeeping alarm)
Check the relevant station alarm associated with the

input housekeeping indication.
EQP
Equipment alarm
Synthesis of alarms of the Equipment domain.
TRS
Transmission alarm
Synthesis of alarms of the Transmission domain.
Local Access state
GREEN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has the

OS permission to manage the NE (granted).
CYAN LED: Indicates that the Craft Terminal has not
the OS permission to manage the NE (denied).
NE reachable/unreachable
GREEN LED: Identifies the Enable operational state

of the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( SDH
service link up ).
RED LED: Identified the Disable operational state of
the connection between NE and Craft Terminal ( service
link down ).
SUP
Supervision state
GREEN LED: NE is under supervision.

BROWN LED: NE is not under supervision.
Used in the OS.
ALI
Alignment
Alignment status of the SH MIB respect to the

equipment MIB.
OS
OS Management
GREEN LED: No OS is currently managing the NE.

CYAN LED: Indicates that the NE is currently under
supervision by an OS.
AC
Abnormal Condition
GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.

CYAN LED: Detection of an ABNORMAL operative
condition. Type: switch forcing.
NTP server state
GREEN LED: Normal operating condition.

CYAN LED: Indicates that the NTP server provided with
the craft terminal is not working properly.
WNG
COM
NTP
332/348
alarms
that
needs
The following table summarizes the information obtained in the alarm view starting from the left column.
Alarm information, general description
TITLE
DESCRIPTION
Severity
severity associated with the alarm and assigned in the Alarm Profile
Event time
time the alarm was generated
Entity
entity involved in the alarm
Probable Cause
probable cause of the alarm
Managed Object Class
class of the alarm
The information supplied helps the operator during the troubleshooting operations.
Table on page supplies general information on the alarm meanings and on the respective maintenance actions
to be taken based on the information given in the applications.
The maintenance action must take into account the board where the alarm is detected.
The Housekeeping alarms are referred to the input external point relevant to the Housekeeping signals. They
are available to the customer by connecting them to a dedicated subrack connector.
333/348
Appendix 8 Alarm Details

General issues of the alarm meanings and their respective maintenance actions
ALARM
MEANING
MAINTENANCE ACTION
AIS
AIS detection on the tributary in Tx Check the 2 Mbit connected

side or Rx side
equipment
Cable LOS
Problem on the cable or on the ODU
Dem fail
Demodulator failure affecting the

Replace the ODU
demodulated signal
Dem LOS
Loss of the incoming signal at the Check the link (propagation

demodulator input
problem)
Early Warning
Early Warning at Rx side
Check the link (propagation

problem)
High BER
Excessive BER
Excessive errors. Check the link

(propagation problem)
Incompatible Frequency
Frequency setting incompatible with Change the frequency or change the

the ODU P/N
ODU
Incompatible PTX
Output power out of the limits
Replace the ODU
Link Identifier Mismatch
Mismatch on the link identifier
Check the correct connection of the

cable between the IDU and the
relevant ODU. If the connection is
correct, check the link (propagation
problem)
Loss Of Signal
LOS at the Tx tributary input
Check the line
Low BER
Low BER at the Rx side

problem)
Mod fail
Internal modulator failure affecting

Replace the ODU
the modulated signal
Mod LOS
No signal at the modulator input
Investigate by using the loopback

facilities with the CT.
PPP Fail
PPP link failure
Check that the NMS is configured

with the correct mode and that the
peer is correctly configured and in
service. In case of V.11 NMS, check
that the cable is connected and
working properly.
Provisioning Mismatch
Provisioning data is refused by Information is compliant

equipment
equipment characteristics
334/348
Replace the ODU; if the alarm is still

active replace the cable.
with
ALARM
MEANING
MAINTENANCE ACTION
Remote Inventory Failure
Remote Inventory can not be Minor alarm. Check the concerned

recovered from a board or unit
board/unit
Replaceable Unit Problem
Problem on a replaceable unit
Replaceable Unit Type

Mismatch
Mismatch between the installed unit Change the unit configuration or

and the sw configured unit
change the unit
Replaceable Unit Missing
No unit in a configured slot
Install the unit
Rx Fail (Radio alarm)
No RF received signal

problem)
Threshold Cross
Performance threshold has been

Errors on the link
crossed
Unavailable Time
Performance alarm:
unavailable seconds
Tx Fail (Radio alarm)
Transmitter failure
Unconfigured Equipment
Present
Unit present in an unconfigured slot Configure the unit
Housekeeping
Active input housekeeping
Too
many
Replace the unit
Errors on the link

Replace the ODU
Check the housekeeping
335/348
Appendix 9 List of models and commercial items

Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flat
ODU
Mnemonic
Model number
Comments
4QAM/16QAM RTPC
Outdoor unit 9411 fs=530MHz 11
3CC14483AAxx
3CC14116AAxx
3CC14484AAxx
3CC14117AAxx
3CC13688AAxx

3DB05524AAAA
3CC13690AAxx
3CC13691AAxx
3CC13692AAxx
3CC13693AAxx
3CC13694AAxx
3CC13695AAxx
3CC13696AAxx

3DB05526AAAA
3CC13697AAxx
3CC13698AAxx
3CC13699AAxx
3CC13704AAxx

3DB05525AAAA

3CC13705AAxx
3CC13706AAxx
3CC13707AAxx
3DB05527AAAA
3CC13712AAxx
3CC13713AAxx
3CC13714AAxx
3DB05227AAAA
3CC13715AAxx
3CC13716AAxx
3CC13717AAxx
3CC12999AAxx

3DB05228AAAA
3CC13000AAxx
3CC13001AAxx
3CC13002AAxx
3CC13468AAxx

3DB05530AAAA

336/348
3CC13689AAxx
3CC13469AAxx
3CC13470AAxx
3CC13471AAxx
3DB05229AAAA
3CC12995AAxx
3CC12996AAxx
Outdoor equipment 94xxUX flat

ODU
Mnemonic
Model number
Comments
4QAM/16QAM RTPC
3CC13718AAxx
3DB05532AAAA
3CC13719AAxx
3CC13720AAxx
3CC13721AAxx
3CC13726AAxx

3DB05531AAAA
3CC13727AAxx
3CC13728AAxx
3CC13729AAxx
3CC13734AAxx

3DB05534AAAA
3CC13735AAxx
3CC13736AAxx
3CC13737AAxx
3CC14388AAxx

3DB05533AAAA
3CC14389AAxx
3CC14390AAxx
3CC14391AAxx
3CC14400AAxx

3DB05533AAAA
3CC14401AAxx
3CC14402AAxx
3CC14403AAxx
3CC13738AAxx
3CC13739AAxx
3CC13740AAxx
3CC13741AAxx
3CC12987AAxx

3DB05225AAAA
3CC12988AAxx
3CC12989AAxx
3CC12990AAxx
337/348
Indoor equipment
Mnemonic
Model number
Light Indoor unit standalone 19
9400UXB260 3CC09426AAxx
Light Indoor unit standalone 19

lowconsumption
9400UXB270
Light IDU for BTS (Plugin IDU)
9400UXB261 3CC11141AAxx
Main Indoor Unit 4x2 Mbit/s
9400UXB201
9400UXB202 3CC08972Axxx
9400UXB203 3CC08971Axxx
Main Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s
9400UXB204 3CC08920Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+0
9400UXB211
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 basic
9400UXB221 3CC08898Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot.

4x2 Mbit/s
9400UXB231 3CC08976Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 8x2

Mbit/s
9400UXB232 3CC08975AAxx
Commentss
3CC09426ACxx
3CC08973Axxx
3CC08897Axxx
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 16x2 9400UXB233 3CC08974AAxx

Mbit/s
Extension Indoor Unit 1+1 mux prot. 34+2 9400UXB234 3CC08908AAxx
Mbit/s
Access Indoor Unit nx2 Mbit/s
9400UXB141 3CC06751ABxx
Access Indoor Unit 34+2 Mbit/s
9400UXB144 3CC08977AAxx
Software Feature Key Unit
9400XXB007
Main IDU Connector Kit
338/348
3CC07619ABxx
3CC08048ABxx
LUX 50 Craft Kit
3EJ03500AA
AA
3CC14311AAxx
Craft Terminal
946LUX 50 (set
of CDROM)
LUX 50 Craft Kit
3EJ03500AA
AA
3AL79552AAxx
1320 CT
Operators
Handbook
3CC12903AGxx
Multilingual
Alcatel 9400 LX
& UX CDROM
Handbook
3CC14134AAxx
Cable Adapter
CTIDU LUX50
Cable Adapter CTIDU LUX50
3EJ03500AB
AA
3CC14134AAxx
Cable Adapter
CTIDU LUX50
Craft Terminal 946LUX 50 SW CD
3EJ03500AC
AA
3CC07619ABxx
Craft Terminal
946LUX 50 (set
of CDROM)
LXUX Documentation CDROM
9400UXD103
3CC12903AGxx
A.9.1
LIST OF MODELS AND COMMERCIAL ITEMS
This table maps the various items in the installation manual to the commercial references by which they are sold.
The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated according to the
equipment configuration.
OUTDOOR PARTS
Installations
Commercial
code
Article
Comments
Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+0 (integrated

antenna)
9400UXI102
3CC10752AAxx
Outdoor adjustable pole mounting 1+1 (integrated

antenna)
9400UXI101
3CC06071AAxx
Wind strengthening
9400UXI103
3CC11453AAxx
Optional
Outdoor fix pole mounting (non integrated antenna)
9413UXI102
77096359
Adapter nose
1AB128510002
Support
9413UXI103
3CC05751ACxx
Flextwist 13 GHz 60 cm
9415UXI102
1AB146090001
Adapter nose
1AB128510002
Support
9415UXI103
3CC05750ACxx
Flextwist 15 GHz 60 cm
9418UXI102
1AB146090002
Adapter nose
1AB128510002
Support
9418UXI103
3CC05749ACxx
Flextwist 18GHz 60 cm
942xUXI102
77096356
Adapter nose (23/25 GHz)
13 GHz
15 GHz
18 GHz
1AB128510002
Support
9423UXI103
3CC05749ACxx
Flextwist 23 /25GHz 60 cm
Integrated antenna 13 GHz 0.6m
9413UXI002
3CC06215AAAB
9415UXI001
3CC10952AAxx
9415UXI002
3CC06321AAAB
9418UXI001
3CC10953AAxx
9418UXI002
3CC06628AAAB
9423UXI001
3CC06217AAAB
9423UXI002
3CC06216AAAB
9425UXI001
3CC06629AAAB
9425UXI002
3CC06630AAAB
9438UXI001
3CC06631AAAB
9438UXI002
3CC06632AAAB
Fix attenuator 13/15/18 GHz
9413UXR120
3CC08543AAxx
3CC08543ABxx
3CC08543ACxx
H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 13 GHz
9413UXR112
3CC07725AAxx
9415UXR112
3CC07998AAxx
9418UXR112
3CC11263AAxx
H polarization kit for HSB coupler, 23 & 25 GHz
942xUXR112
3CC11264AAxx
23 / 25 GHz
9438UXR112
3CC08024AAxx
Pipe
SUPOUTD001
3CC04658AExx
Self supported mast
SUPMAST001
3CC05148AAxx
3 dB
6 dB
10 dB
339/348
INDOOR PARTS
Installations
Commercial
code
Article
Comments
Fan replacement kit
9400UXZ200
3CC11761AAxx
Contains 2 fans (12 V)
Fan replacement kit
9400UXZ201
3CC12847AAxx
Contains 2 fans (5 V)
19 supporting rack
9400XXI300
77095106
Indoor wall mounting 3U
9400UXI301
3CC09614AAxx
3CC07966AAxx
3CC07957AAxx
Includes a set of connectors

and supplies, an alternative to
the 19 support rack
Indoor wall mounting 9U
9400UXI302
1AD029510001
Alternative to the 19 support

rack
Indoor desktop mounting kit (standalone solution)
9400UXI303
3CC08295AAxx
Includes a set of connectors

and supplies, an alternative to
the 19 support rack
19 DC distributor board (6 accesses)
9400XXC511
77096294
3CC08165
48 V
19 DC distributor board (6 accesses)
9400XXC511
77096294
3CC08211AAxx
3CC08209AAxx
3CC08212AAxx
24 V
Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses)
9400XXC512
77096248
3CC08165AAxx
3CC08211AAxx
48 V
Wall mounting DC distributor board (6 accesses)
9400XXC512
77096248
3CC08209AAxx
3CC08212AAxx
24 V
Consumable set
9400UXT002
3CC06503AAxx
Service kit
9400UXT102
3CC07972AAxx
1AF00375ABxx
Telephone headset cable
Light service kit
9400UXT112
3CC07972AAxx
Cable
3EG04113AAAA
3CC13477AAxx
Cable
Station tool kit
9400UXT103
3CC08409AAxx
One for each station
Telephone handset
9400XXB000
3CC07946AAxx
Cable tray Indoor Cablofil 6 m
INFRA00003
3CC07580AAxx
Cable tray Indoor PVC 4 m
INFRA00004
3CC06511AAxx
Cable tray Outdoor CES 12 m
INFRA00005
3CC06512AAxx
Cable tray Outdoor CAPRI 12 m
INFRA00006
3CC06759AAxx
Light service kit for 9400UX flat ODU
Battery
M4T28BR12SH1
1AB084760003
The following table maps the various items in the installation manual to the commercial references by which they
are sold. The composition of each item is given by way of indication; the definitive list is generated according
to the equipment configuration.
340/348
CABLING
Installations
Commercial
code
Article
Comments
Additional cable for 1+1 configuration
9400UXC130
3CC07157ABxx
note : the cable

3CC07160ABxx is attached to
the commercial reference of
the extension IDU
Back to back cables
9400UXC333
3CC08729AAxx
Telephone service channel
9400UXC332
3CC07711AAxx
Supervision
Indoor/Outdoor cable (length < 300 meters)
9400UXI202
1AC001100022
Per 50 m
Indoor/Outdoor cable connector set (2 pieces)
9400UXI203
1AB095530021
Indoor/Outdoor cable grounding kit
9400UXI204
1AB128500002
Power supply
pp y connection kit
9400XXC501
3CC08165AAxx
48 V (per 20m)
3CC08209AAxx
24 V (per 20m)
Grounding connection kit (IDU + ODU)
9400XXC502
3CC08166AAxx
Per 20 m
120 Ohms cable 16 pairs
9400XXI504
3CC08809AAxx
Per 15 m
One terminal block 10 pairs
9400XXI505
3CC07921AAxx
3CC05527AAxx
75 Ohms connection kit (2 tributaries)
9400XXI506
3CC07917AAxx
Per 15 m
Alarm cable 1 pair
9400XXI508
3CC08811AAxx
Per 15 m
Alarm cable 15 pairs
9400XXI509
3CC08817AAxx
Per 15 m
Distributor panel 4 x 2 Mbit/s
9400XXI404
3CC08061AAxx and
3CC07885AAxx or
3CC07885ADxx
75 / 1.6/5.6. Use adapters if

BNC ports are requested
9400XXI404
+ 1 x 9400XXI405
3CC08061ABxx and
3CC07759AAxx or
3CC07759ADxx
75 / BNC
9400XXI408
3CC08061AAxx and
3CC07885ABxx or
3CC07885AExx
75 / 1,6/5,6
9400XXI408
+ 2 x 9400XXI405
3CC08061ABxx and
3CC07759ABxx or
3CC07759AExx
75 / BNC
9400XXI408
3CC07810AAxx
3CC07658AAxx
120 EMC
9400XXI408
3CC08062AAxx
3CC07658AAxx
120 non EMC
9400XXI416
3CC08061AAxx and
2x3CC07885ABxx or
2x3CC07885AExx
75 / 1.6/5.6
9400XXI416
+ 4 x 9400XXI405
3CC08061ABxx and
2x3CC07759ABxx or
2x3CC07759AExx
75 / BNC
9400XXI416
3CC07810AAxx
2x3CC07658AAxx
120 EMC
9400XXI416
3CC08062AAxx
2x3CC07658AAxx
120 non EMC
BNC adapter
9400XXI405
3CC08249AAxx
To be ordered if the 34 Mbit/s

tributary is used with BNC
connector
F interface cable adapter
9400XX
3CC14134AAxx
Adapter CTIDU LUX50
341/348
Appendix 10 Software and documentation list

A.10.1
Software
Software
identification
Minimum
Item Change
Status (ICS)
3CC14057AAAA
02
Software
identification
Minimum
Item Change
Status (ICS)
CLASSIC IDU (MCU)
3CC08538AAxx
06
LIGHT IDU (MCU)
3CC08755AAxx
04
EXTENSION IDU (SCU)
3CC08540AAxx
07
Embedded software IDU (360)

CLASSIC IDU (MCU)
Embedded software IDU (302)
Embedded software ODU
ODU (7/8 GHz)
3CC08431ABxx
02
Minimum
Item Change
Status (ICS)
3CC14311AAAA
03
Commercial
Code
CDROM
identification
Minimum
Item Change
Status (ICS)
9400UXD103
3CC12903AGAA
01
3AL79552AAAA
01
Craft Terminal 946LUX 50
Documentation
Documentation CDROM
Alcatel 9400UX
1320 CT Operators Handbook
342/348
Item
Change
Status
(ICS)
CDROM
identification
CDROM Craft Terminal

(including IDU 360 Embedded SW)
A.10.2
Software
identification
Appendix 11 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

MNEMONIC
AC
DEFINITION
Abnormal condition
ACO
Alarm cut-off
ADC
Analog/Digital Converter
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ATPC
Automatic Transmission Power Control
BBE
Number of errored blocks that are not part of an SES
BER
Bit Error Rate
BTS
Base Transceiver Station
CIA_NUM
CT
Digital Cable Interface Adapter

Craft Terminal
DCE
Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF
Dual-Tone Multi Frequency
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
ES
Errored seconds
ESC
Engineering Service Channel
ESD
ElectroStatic Discharge
ESR
Early Switching Request
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FD
Frequency Diversity
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
HDB3
High Density Binary 3 code (3rd order)
HDLC
High-level Data Link Communication
HSB
Hot StandBy
IDU
InDoor Unit
IF
Intermediate Frequency
I2C
Inter Integrated Circuit
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
JRE
Java Runtime Environment
LAU
Line Access Unit
LED
Light Emitting Diode
343/348
LIU
Line Interface Unit
LO
Local Oscillator
MCU_NUM
MDU
NE
Modulation/Demodulation Unit
Network Element
NMC
Network Management Center
NMS
Network Management System
NTP
Network Time Protocol
OCT
Office Craft Terminal
ODU
OutDoor Unit
OS
Operation System
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PRBS
PseudoRandom Binary Sequence
PSU
RF
RTPC
RX
SCU_NUM
SD
SES
SI
Power Supply Unit

Radio Frequency
Remote Transmit Power Control
Receiver
Service Channel Unit with digital cable interface
Space Diversity
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable seconds
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol resulting from TCP/IP

architecture used on Ethernet type networks
SWP
Software Package
TMN
Telecom Management Network
TX
UAS
UF
UX Flat ODU
VCXO
344/348
Multiplexing and Control Unit with digital cable interface
Transmitter
Unavailable seconds
Manufacturing unit
9400 UX with a Flat outdoor unit
Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator
INDEX
A
Alarm & Remote control, wiring, 102
Alarms, description, 40
Antenna
coarse alignement, 80
polarization, 75
Assembling, "N" type coaxial connectors, 320
B
Between a terminal's units, wiring, 103
Between terminals of a station, wiring, 105
Bit rate
changing by software, 269
changing via LAU/LIU boards, 270
Branching blocks, 252
C
Capacity, configuration, 26
Changing
1+1 coupler polarisation, 302
bit rate by software, 269
bit rate via LAU/LIU boards, 270
configuration, 257
fans, 306
frequency, 259
fuse, 308
IDU, 253
MCU board battery, 304
NE physical address, 273
ODU, 255
power level, 300
redundancy configurations, 295
SIMM memories, 303
software key, 273
tributaries, 260
tributary impedance, 268
Coarse alignment, antenna, 80
Commissioning
end, 249
equipment, 241
checking, 246, 247, 248, 249
order, 241
station A
(phase 1), 242
(phase 2), 247
station B, 245
Configuration, 20, 21
1+0, 28
1+1, 32
capacity, 26
changing, 257
hardware, 26
indoor unit, 277
multiplexer/demultiplexer protection, 34
remote indication loops, 292
service channels, 280
service channels 3, 291
software, 107
Configuration with non-integrated antenna,
installing, 89
Consumables, set, 317
Controls, indications and connectors, IDU, 43
Access version, 47
Classic version, 43
Extension version, 46
D
Delivery, equipment, 61
Description
alarms, 40
equipment, 19
IDU/ODU cable, 30
loopback, 40
service channels, 36
telesignalling and remote controls, 40
E
Human exposure, Electromagnetic fields, 309
End, commissioning, 249
Engineering service channel, wiring, 101
Equipment
commissioning, 241
checking, 246, 247, 248, 249
delivery, 61
description, 19
features, 22, 25
grounding, 95
installing, 68
labels, 62
maintenance, 251
management, 42
operation, 251
servicing, 251
wiring, 94
F
Fans, changing, 306
345/348
Features, equipment, 22, 25
Manual
structure, 13
using, 13
Frequency, changing, 259

Fuse, changing, 308
MCU board battery, changing, 304

Model, list, 334
Grounding, equipment, 95
NE physical address, changing, 273
I
IDU
changing, 253
controls, indications and connectors, 43
Access version, 47
Classic version, 43
Extension version, 46
opening, 276
IDU/ODU, wiring, 97
IDU/ODU cable, description, 30
Indoor unit, configuration, 277
Installation
information, 314
tools, 68
Installing
equipment, 68
laborack, 70
Light IDU 19" version, 69
software, 108
wall mounting, 70
Item, list, 334
L
Labels, equipment, 62
Laborack, installing, 70
Light IDU 19" version, installing, 69
List
items, 334
models, 334
Loopback, description, 40
M
Maintenance
corrective, 251, 252
equipment, 251
preventive, 251
Management, equipment, 42
346/348
O
ODU
changing, 255
installing, 73
ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 85
installing, 92
ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,
installing, 92
Installing, 85
configuration with non-integrated antenna, 89
ODU, 73
ODU 9400UX flat ODU, 92
ODU 94xxUXR201, 94xxUXR202, 94xxUXR203,
92
pole mounting
9400UXI101, 83
9400UXI102, 75
on the pipe, 80, 86
Opening, IDU, 276
Operation, 28
equipment, 251
software, 107
Order, commissioning, 241
P
Pin out, user ports, 322
Pointing the antenna
pole mounting 1+0, 9400UXI102, 246
pole mounting 1+1, 9400UXI101, 245
Polarization, antenna, 75
Pole mounting
9400UXI101, installing, 83
9400UXI102, installing, 75
on the pipe, 80, 86
Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI101), pointing the
antenna, 245
Pole mounting 1+0 (9400UXI102), pointing the
antenna, 246
S
Safety, instructions, 14
Telesignalling and remote controls, description, 40

Tools, installation, 68
Service channels, description, 36
Tributaries
changing, 260
wiring, 99
Service kit, 318
Tributary impedance, changing, 268
Service channel, telephone, 279
Servicing, equipment, 251

Software
configuration, 107
installing, 108
operation, 107
Software key, changing, 273
Station A, commissioning
(phase 1), 242
(phase 2), 247
Station B, commissioning, 245
Symbols, 14, 15
T
Technical characteristics, 49
U
Upgrading, software, 274
W
Wall mounting, installing, 70
Wiring
alarm & remote control, 102
between a terminal's units, 103
between terminals of a station, 105
engineering service channel, 101
equipment, 94
IDU/ODU, 97
tributaries, 99
347/348
END OF DOCUMENT
348/348

Lux 50 Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lux 50 Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lux 50 Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ALCATEL

Short Title Alcatel 9400UX LUX50 2.0

Issue 01 January 2005

11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25 or 38 GHz

Issue 01 January 2005

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Issue 01 January 2005

Customer Service Support:

a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction

Congratulations on having bought your equipment from Alcatel.

Issue 01 January 2005

PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Issue 01 January 2005

1.1 Structure of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 Description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 Alcatel 9400 Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3 Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.4 Alarms, telesignalling and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5 Loopback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.7 IDU controls, indications and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8 Technical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9 Frequency agility bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Labels on the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.3 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 01 January 2005

3.3.1 Information required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4 Installing 19 IDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.5 Outdoor part installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.7 Wiring between a terminals units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.8 Wiring between terminals of a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Configuration and operation software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Summary of SW installation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 CT initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.4 Software download toward NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6 General Introduction to views and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.7 Introduction to the menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 01 January 2005

4.10 LINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.12 EXTERNAL POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.14 PROTECTION SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.18 Software Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Order of commissioning for a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issue 01 January 2005

5.2 Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3 Installing and commissioning station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4 Commissioning the link from station A (phase 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Operation, servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 Corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.3 Changing IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4 Changing ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.1 Changing frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.2 Changing tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.3 Changing software feature key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .